User guide

USER GUIDE
This guide is intended for users of all levels of expertise. The guide describes in detail Sitefinity user interface - from logging to
completing a project. Use it to learn how to create pages and structure the sitemap, create layout for the pages and populate it
with widgets. Learn to use the content modules to create content, such as news, forms, and events, and upload different kinds of
media and files. Add languages and translate both pages and content items and use a sophisticated publishing system to manage
the workflow of your pages and content items.
| How to read Sitefinity offline documentation [3] |

Logging to Sitefinity [4]
Learn how to login to Sitefinity and what possible errors you can get if you do not have proper permissions.
|Viewing your profile and changing your password [5] |

Creating and managing pages [6]
Learn how to create the pages of your website, how to structure them, how to edit their content and properties, manage
permissions for pages, and more.
| Creating a new page [7] | Translating a page [9] | Editing a page [13] | Structuring the pages of your website [14] |
| Viewing version history of a page [16] | Sorting and filtering pages [17] | Setting permissions for pages [18] |
| Other functions for pages [18] |

Editing your page layout [19]
Learn how to create a layout for your page that helps you display content on the page. You can work with predefined layouts,
modify the predefined layouts, create your own layouts, or upload custom layout templates and themes.
| Applying a template to a page [20] | Applying a theme to a page [21] | Modifying the layout [21] |

Creating and uploading content [23]
After you have created your page layout, learn how to populate your pages with content by creating and publishing reusable
content, such as news, events, images, videos and more and how to organize content with the help of classifications.
| Using the content modules [24] | Creating and editing content while browsing the website [81] |
| Viewing version history of a content item [82] | Managing comments for content items [83] | Adding custom fields to content items [84] |
| Using the text editor [87] | Classifying your content [87] | Translating content items and classifications [94] |
| Creating and editing feeds [95] | Defining search indexes [100] |

Defining and managing a workflow [101]
Learn how to create a workflow for managing the lifecycle of content items and pages. You do that by creating first and
second level of approval for content items and pages.
| Defining a workflow [102] | Editing a workflow [103] | Activating and deactivating a workflow [104] |

Managing the status of content items and pages [104]
Learn about the different statuses of content items and pages, how to set and change the status, and how to use statuses to
manage the lifecycle workflow of content items or pages.
| Types of statuses [105] | Setting the status of a new page or content item [106] |
| Managing a page or content item that is Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected [108] |
| Managing a page or content item that is Awaiting approval [110] | Managing a content item or page that is Awaiting publishing [111] |
| Managing a page or content item that is Published [113] | Managing a page or content item that is Scheduled [114] |

Displaying content using widgets [115]
To display content you use widgets, which you drop on the page and configure them to display already existing content. Learn
how to add widgets on your page and how to configure them.
| Adding widgets on your page [116] | Content widgets group [117] | Navigation widgets group [132] |
| Scripts and Styles widgets group [139] | Login widgets group [141] | Search widgets group [143] | Users widgets group [144] |
| Classifications widgets group [150] | Newsletters widgets group [152] | Advanced configuration of widgets [153] |
| Widgets configuration modes reference [154] |

1

Working with Sitefinity Analytics module [155]
Learn how to use the analytics module to track your website traffic and marketing effectiveness.
| Setting up Analytics [156] | Filtering, displaying, and grouping data [157] | Using the Analytics map [161] |
| Understanding the Dashboard [163] | Information about website visitors [166] | Technical information about the visitors [170] |
| Information about website traffic sources [177] | Information about the visited content [181] |
| Information about the website internal search [185] | Customizing Analytics [189] | Index of reports [190] |

Sitefinity basic settings [191]
Learn how to use the Basic Settings page to easily change the most important and commonly used settings.
| Managing languages [192] | Managing comments [193] | Managing Twitter applications [193] | Newsletters settings [194] |

2

HOW TO READ SITEFINITY OFFLINE DOCUMENTATION

TEXT FORMATTING CONVENTIONS

The following table contains examples and descriptions of all the styles you will encounter in the Sitefinity offline documentation:

Format Meaning Example

Example Hyperlink Link to a topic in the same guide:
For more information, see Creating pages.
A clickable text that is link to another topic from the
documentation or an external resource. Link to an external resource:
For more information, see Google Analytics
Help.

Example Words or characters that appear on the screen. Click Administration  Roles and in Assign to
dropdown box, select Backend users.
For example, menu and button labels, titles of windows, etc.

Example Important text that needs to be emphasized Make sure you have selected at least one
checkbox.
Titles of tables and of table columns

Titles of charts.

Example Source code, names of files and folders. The error.log file is located in folder Logs.

Example Exact user entry. In the input field that appears, enter 23
kilograms and click Next.
Enter the text in the system, exactly as it appears in the
documentation.

<Example> Variable user entry In the input field, enter <your age>.

Replace the text in the brackets with the appropriate entry.

EXAMPLE Key on your keyboard When you are finished, press ENTER.

NOTE: The above styles do not apply to Sitefinity Developer’s Guide.

NAVIGATING THE DOCUMENTATION

NAVIGATION PANE

Sitefinity PDF documentation support bookmark links. To use navigation to all topics of a document, you must open the navigation pane. For more
information, see your PDF reader documentation.

In you are using Adobe Reader, you open the navigation pane, by clicking icon in the upper-left part of the window.

USING TABLE OF CONTENTS AND SECTION CONTENTS

The documentation is divided in topics. Topics are organized in section topics. If a topic is a section topic and it has subtopics, it contains a Section
contents. The Section contents contains links to its subtopics. Using the breadcrumb, you can navigate from each subtopic to its section topic.
NOTE: In Table of contents, all topics and subtopics are displayed with their page number in squared parentheses.

USING THE BREADCRUMBS

Each topic has breadcrumb links at the end of the topic. Following is an example of breadcrumbs:

| Structuring the pages of your website | Creating and managing pages | Table of contents |

You can use the bread crumbs to navigate to the section topic and all existing levels of topics above the section topic up to the section of contents.

NAVIGATING BETWEEN DIFFERENT GUIDES AND TUTORIALS

You can download all offline versions of Sitefinity documentation from http://www.sitefinity.com/4.0/documentation/.

3

LOGGING TO SITEFINITY
1. You login to Sitefinity, in one of the following ways, depending on the rights you have:

 Open your webpage and in the address bar of your browser, after the address of your webpage, enter /Sitefinity.

 Open the Sitefinity Project Manager, select the project you want to edit and click Go to Administration button in the
function bar of the manager. For more information about Sitefinity Project Manager, see Sitefinity Installation and
Administration Guide  Running a project.
The following login screen appears:

2. Enter your username and password and click Login.
You can change your password on the Profile page.

The Dashboard of Sitefinity opens:

The Dashboard is the welcoming page of Sitefinity administration, where you also have the following sections, represented as
tabs:

 Pages
Use this tab to create, edit, and delete pages and page templates. You can change the status and properties of pages and
manage the sitemap.
For more information, see Creating and managing pages.

 Content
Use this tab to create and classify reusable content items, such as news, events, blog posts, etc. You can also upload
different kind of media and documents.
This guide describes the actions which you can perform on this tab.
For more information, see Creating and uploading content.

4

 Design
Use this tab for creating and designing page templates and themes.
For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide.

 Administration
Use this tab to activate and manage your license, to manage roles, users, and permissions and to perform various
administration tasks.
For more information, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide.

 Analytics
Use this tab to track your website traffic and marketing effectiveness.
For more information, see Working with Sitefinity Analytics module.

PERMISSIONS
 If you do not have the proper permission to access the website, when you try to login the system displays a message
informing you about this and the following screen appears:

Contact your system administrator.

 Depending on the permission settings of your website, your administrator may have not granted you permissions for all of the
tabs, described above. In this case, tabs, for which you do not have permissions, are not visible when you login.

NOTE: If you or somebody else has logged in Sitefinity using your credentials, the following screen appears:

| Table of contents |

VIEWING YOUR PROFILE AND CHANGING YOUR PASSWORD
You can view the information of your profile and change your password on the Profile page.

1. To open the profile page, click Profile link in the upper right corner of the page.
The profile page appears where you can view your profile information.

On this page, you can only change your password. To change other information of your profile, you must open the Users
page. To be able to change user details, you must have the proper permissions.

NOTE: You cannot change the username. You can delete the current user and create a new one.

For more information about changing user details, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing users,
roles, and permissions  Modifying users  Changing user details.
2. To change your password, click Change password button.

3. Enter your old and new password, confirm it and click Change password.

| Logging to Sitefinity | Table of contents |

5

CREATING AND MANAGING PAGES
There are two types of pages in Sitefinity. You can manage both types of pages using Sitefinity:

 Frontend pages
These are all publicly visible pages from the project.
To edit frontend pages, in the main menu at the top, click Pages.

 Backend pages
These are all views in the administrative backend of a Sitefinity project, such as the Dashboard, Content, Administration, and
so on.
To edit backend pages, in the main menu at the top, click Administration  Backend Pages.
The structure of the backend opens in Pages page.

The following screenshot displays Pages page, containing the structure of pages, function bar with buttons, language
translations (if any), and additional functions:

NOTE: If you are not using multiple languages, the language translations icons are not displayed on Pages page and there is
no Languages dropdown box in the right side of the page. The system displays the multilingual mode automatically when you
add an additional frontend language. For more information, see Managing languages.

On Pages page you can create and edit pages, browse and organize the structure of your website.

NOTE: Before editing a page, on Pages page, you can preview it by clicking View link of the respective page.

Section contents

Create a new page
Use this section to create pages and set the different properties of the page.

Create a language translation of a page
Use this section to create a new language translation of an existing page.

Edit pages
Use this section to edit the properties of a page and see how to edit the content of a page.

Structure the pages of your website
Use this section to structure and organize your website. Create subpages and move pages in the hierarchy.

View version history of a page
Use this section to view and compare different versions of a page.

Sort and filter pages
Use this section to sort and filter the pages on Pages page.

6

Set permissions for pages
Use this section to set permissions for all pages, as well as to set different permissions for each individual page.

Other functions for pages
Learn about other functions, such as deleting and duplication a page, changing page author and template, and more.


CREATING A NEW PAGE
1. In the main menu at the top of the screen, click Pages.
The Pages page appears, displaying one of the following:

 If you have not created any pages, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first page you create is in the default language.

 If you have already created one or more pages, the system displays the sitemap and the following button in the function
bar of Pages page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating a page, you must first choose the language in which you
want to create the page. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.

For more information about different languages, see Managing languages.

2. To create a new page, click the Create a page.
The Create a page page appears.

3. Enter the following information for the new page:

Name The page name that you choose is used by the system to create auto-generated navigation links. The
name must be as concise as possible.
(mandatory field)
EXAMPLE: Company Info

Put this page… Use this radio button group to select the new page's parent page. The section determines where the
page sits in the hierarchy of pages.
radio button group
Choose between the following:
 At the top level
This will be a top level page that has no parent.

 Under parent page…
A treeview with existing pages appears.
Select the page that will be parent of the page you are creating.
NOTE: If you have not created any pages yet, choose At the top level button. You can make the
page a subpage of another page later, using drag and drop.
For more information, see Structuring the pages of your website.

URL The URL is automatically generated based on the page name that you have chosen. The URL
determines the new page's website address.
You can choose another URL by clicking Change button and entering the new name in the input field
that appears.
This overwrites the automatically generated URL.

Show in navigation If you deselect the Show in navigation checkbox, the page is not displayed in the automatically
generated navigation. The page can be viewed only if linked or accessed directly. You can also control
the page access by the page's permissions.

7

For more information, see Setting permissions for pages.

Group page If you select the Use this page only to group other pages checkbox, the page you are creating is going
to be a group page.
Group pages serve as containers for other pages. Group pages do not have their own content. When
you open a group page it redirects to its first subpage (child).

If you select this checkbox, skip the rest of this procedure and click Create and return to Pages button.
The system returns you to Pages page.

Title for search The title used by search engines is automatically generated based on the page name you have chosen.
engines
You can choose another title by clicking Change button and entering a new title or deleting the
automatically generated one.
The page title that you enter in this field is used in search engine results, web browser bookmarks and
the web browser's title. The title must be descriptive.
EXAMPLE: XYZ Company - Company Information.

Template In this radio button group you choose the layout of the new page.
Select one of the following:
 Use template
This option is selected by default.
Under the radio button the system displays the template that will be used for the page.
To change the template, click Select another Template button.
A list of all available templates appears.

1. Select a template in one of the following ways:

 Click one of the templates displayed.
You can customize or change the layout template at a later time.
For more information, see Editing your page layout.

 Upload your own .master file by clicking Use your own .master file.
Select a master file from the App_Master folder and click Use Selected.
To select a master file from another folder, in the upper-right corner of the window, click
Browse other folders button.
For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Creating a template.

For more information about .master files, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Creating a
template Creating a template using Master pages.
For more information about the App_Master folder, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide 
Website templates file structure.
2. Click Done.

 Don’t use template (start from scratch)
The page does not have a template. You can add a template later.

Description To add a description of the page, click Description, Keywords.
The description that you enter is added to the page's header. The description is often used by search
engines to provide a summary of the webpage.
EXAMPLE: Information about XYZ Company's locations, history, corporate directory, employment
opportunities, etc.

Keywords To add keywords, click Description, Keywords.
The keywords that you choose are conveying additional meaning to search engines and may have SEO
benefits.
EXAMPLE: The keywords for the page XYZ Company - Company Information can be XYZ Company,
History, Hiring, Employment, Locations, Contact Information. When you enter the keywords for your
page in the Keywords input field, separate them with commas.

Advanced options By expanding this node, you can configure the following:

8

 Allow search engines to index this page
This option is selected by default and you must deselect it only if you do not want search engines,
such as Google, to find your page.

 Require SSL
Improve security by requiring Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol to communicate with the server.

 Enable ViewState
EnableViewState stores the current state of the page and its objects, such as text boxes, buttons,
and tables. It helps you not to lose the state of the page during the requests, but it slows down the
browser.

 Include RadScriptManager
For more information, see http://www.telerik.com/help/aspnet-ajax/radscriptmanager.html.

 Enable Caching...
 Allow multiple URLs for this page
a. To configure a page to have more than one URL, select Allow multiple URLs for this item...
checkbox.

b. In the input box, enter the additional URLs that you want this page to have.
Enter one URL per line.

c. If you want all the URLs that you have entered to point to the default URL of the page, select
All additional URLs redirect to the default one checkbox.
If you uncheck the checkbox, each URL will display the page without redirecting.

4. After you have entered all the information, required to create a page, click one of the following:

 Create and go to add content
The page is created and the system opens the page in content editing mode.
In content editing mode you can customize the layout of the page, add content by adding widgets, and apply themes.
For more information, see Modifying the layout, Displaying content using widgets, Applying a template to a page, and
Applying a theme to a page.
After you have finished modifying the page, perform procedure Setting the status of a new page or content item.

 Create and return to Pages
The page is created and saved in status Draft. The system returns you to Pages page.

 Back to Pages
You return to Pages page without creating and saving the page.

| Creating and managing pages | Table of contents |

TRANSLATING A PAGE
You can create a new language translation of an existing page. The system displays all language translation in which a page exists
in the following way:

 On Pages page:

NOTE: If you have added more than six language translation, on Pages page the system displays only the first six language
icons. To view all created languages, click More translations… link of the respective page. To display all languages for all
pages, click Show all translations link in the upper-right corner of the page.
For each page, languages are displayed in the following way:

9

To display back only the first six translations, click Basic translations only… of the respective page or, if you have expanded all
translations of all pages, click Show basic translations only link in the upper-right corner of the page.

 In page editing mode:

 Language translations of pages, whose language icons are dark blue, already exist.

 Language translations of pages, whose icons are light blue, have not been created yet.

NOTE: Before you create a page in a different than the default language, you must have added this language in the settings of
Sitefinity. For more information, see Managing languages.

Section contents

Translating an existing page

Editing and deleting a translation of a page

For more information about creating a new page in different languages, see Creating a new page.

The system displays pages that exist in multiple languages in the following way:

 The following screenshot displays the English version of a sitemap:

NOTE: In Languages dropdown box in the right pane, English is selected.

 The following screenshot displays the Spanish version of the same sitemap:

10

NOTE: In Languages dropdown box in the right pane, español is selected.

The pages that appear inactive have no translation in the language, selected in Languages dropdown.

NOTE: Different language translations of one page can be in different statuses, if they are not synchronized, and can be at a
different stage in the lifecycle workflow.
For more information about synchronizing translations, see Translating an existing page  Step 3.
For more information, see Defining and managing a workflow.

NOTE: The content items, which are displayed on the page, can also have language translations. When a content item exists in
different languages, each translation is displayed with its respective page translation.
For example, a news item in Spanish is displayed in the News widget in the Spanish version of the page, the English news item is
displayed in the English version of the page. If the French translation of the page contains the News widget, but there is no French
version of the news, the widget does not display anything. For more information, see Translating content items and classifications.

To switch between different language translations in the public part of your website, you must add and configure the Language
selector widget to the page.


TRANSLATING AN EXISTING PAGE
Perform the following procedure:

1. You create a new language translation of an existing page in one of the following ways:

 On Pages page, click the Add link under the respective language icon.

 Open the page in page editing mode and in the upper-left corner of the page, click the Add link of the respective
language.

 On Pages page, in Languages field on the right, select the desired language and click the name of the page, which you
want to translate.
The name of the page appears inactive, to show that the page has no translation in the selected language.

2. Perform procedure Creating a new page  Step 3 (only the relevant fields) and Step 4.

NOTE: When you create a translation of an existing page, the system does not display the Template section. You do not
select a layout at this step, but at Step 3 of the current procedure, where you must choose whether you want to use the
current template of the page or design a new one, just for this translation.
Depending on what you select in Step 4 of Creating a new page procedure, perform the following:

 If you do not select Create and go to add content, the layout of the translated page is not determined until you open the
page for editing.

 If you select Create and return to Pages, skip the rest of this procedure and perform it when you open the translation of
the page for editing.

11

3. Before opening the new page for editing, the system asks you to select one of the following:

 Copy from another language version
A window appears where you select Keep all language versions synced as one page checkbox and click Done.
This means that all created language versions of the page will have the same layout, widget configurations, and status.
Any changes to any of the translations will apply to all other translations.
After that, every other language translation you create is synchronized with the existing and the system does not ask you
if you want to copy or create a new language translation.

NOTE: When you have your pages synchronized you cannot have different language versions in different workflow
statuses.

When you choose this option, when a language translation of the page is opened in page editing mode, the system
displays the following in the upper part of the page:

 If you want to stop the synchronization between the different language translations, click Stop syncing.
After that, you can edit each page translation separately.

NOTE: Once you stop the synchronization between the different languages, you cannot synchronize them again. You
have different versions of one page.

 To display the icons of all language versions, click Show other translations.
The icons appear and from there you can add new language translations for this page.

NOTE: If you have language versions of a page that are not synchronized and are different, after adding another
language from the system settings and creating a new language translation in this language, you can choose if you want
the new translation to have the same layout and widget configurations as some of the existing translations. In this case, if
you have more than one existing translations, the dropdown box is active and you can choose an already existing
language version.

 Start from scratch
Click this link if you want the different language translations to have different layouts, widget configurations, and status.

The language translation of the page is created and the system opens the page in content editing mode.

4. Use the content editing mode to customize the layout of the page, add content by adding widgets, and apply themes.
For more information, see Modifying the layout, Displaying content using widgets, Applying a template to a page, and Applying
a theme to a page.

NOTE: If your pages are synchronized, any modifications to the layout or the widgets are applied to all existing language
translations of the page.
When you choose to display content items that have different translations, the translation displayed depends on the page
translation which you are working with.
For example, if you have added the News widget to a German translation of a page, the widget displays only the news items
that have German translation. If for the items, you have chosen, no German translation exists, nothing is displayed.

5. When you are finished editing, perform procedure Setting the status of a new page or content item.

NOTE: Setting a status to a synchronized page sets the same status to all translations of the page.

| Translating a page | Creating and managing pages | Table of contents |

EDITING AND DELETING A TRANSLATION OF A PAGE

EDITING THE PROPERTIES OF A TRANSLATED PAGE

1. In the Languages dropdown box, select the language in which you want to edit the page.

2. Perform procedure Editing a page  Editing the properties of a page.

EDITING THE CONTENT OF A TRANSLATED PAGE

1. You edit a language translation of a page in one of the following ways:

12

 On Pages page, click the Edit link under the respective language icon.

 On Pages page, in Languages field on the right, select the desired language and click the name of the page, which you
want to edit.

2. Perform procedure Editing a page  Edit the content of a page.

NOTE: If when creating the language translation of the page, you have clicked Create and return to Pages without going to
content editing mode, before performing Step 2 of the above procedure, you must perform Translating an existing page  Step 4.

DELETING A LANGUAGE TRANSLATION OF A PAGE
On Pages page, you delete a language translation by selecting the respective language in Languages dropdown box and
performing one of the following:

 Select the page(s), whose translation(s) you want to delete and click Delete button in the toolbar.

 Click the actions link of the respective page and click Delete.

IMPORTANT: The system asks you if you want to delete only the current translation of the page or all translations of this page.

| Translating a page | Creating and managing pages | Table of contents |

EDITING A PAGE
There are two ways to edit a page. You can edit the properties of a page, such as name, title, description and you can edit the
content of a page, such as adding layout elements and widgets.

EDITING THE PROPERTIES OF A PAGE
You can edit the properties of a page, such as title, keywords, name, etc.

1. Edit the properties of a page in one of the following ways:

 On Pages page, click the Actions link of the respective page and in the dropdown list, click Title & Properties.

 In page content editing mode, click Title & Properties link in the function bar.

The Edit a page page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a new page  Step 3.

NOTE: The system does not display the selection of template section. You can change the template directly from the page
content editing mode by clicking Layout and then Select another template… button in the lower-right corner of the page.
Perform procedure Applying a template to a page  Step 2 and Step 3.

3. When you are finished, click Save changes.
The system returns you either to Pages page or to page editing mode, depending on where you have started.

EDIT THE CONTENT OF A PAGE
You can edit the content of a page, such as layout elements and widgets.

1. To do this, on Pages page, perform one of the following:

 Click the name of the page.

NOTE: If the page you have clicked is a group page, the system opens the Edit a page page, where you can edit the
properties of the page.

 Click the Actions link of the respective page and click Content.

NOTE: A group page has no content and under Actions there is no Content link.

The page opens in content editing mode.

In content editing mode you can modify the layout, apply a template to a page, and apply a theme to a page.

2. When you are finished editing the page, perform one of the following:

 If you have opened for editing a page in status Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected, perform procedure Managing a page or
content item that is Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected.

13

 If you have opened for approving a page in status Awaiting approval, perform procedure Managing a page or content
item that is Awaiting approval.

 If you have opened for publishing a page in status Awaiting publishing, perform procedure Managing a content item or
page that is Awaiting publishing.

 If you have opened for editing a page in status Published or Scheduled, perform procedures Managing a page or content
item that is Published or Managing a page or content item that is Scheduled respectively.
If you are editing a published page, the system saves a draft of that page, but the published version is still visible on the
webpage. To see which version is the currently published one, see Revision History.

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode and all language translations of your page are synchronized, then setting the
status to one language translation, sets the same status to all translations of this page. For more information about
synchronizing translations, see Translating an existing page  Step 3.


STRUCTURING THE PAGES OF YOUR WEBSITE
You structure the pages of your website by using parent and child pages and group pages. A parent page is a page that has its
own content, but also serves as a node in the hierarchy of pages and has subpages (children).

A group page plays the role of container for pages. It does not have its own content and redirects to its first child page. Group
pages can contain both pages and other group pages. You use group pages to facilitate your website navigation.

On Pages page a group page is represented by icon.

EXAMPLE: In your company website project you create a group page named About us. Under the group page you create pages
Our mission, People, and Contact us. If you put page Our mission first in the list of pages under the group page, when the group
page is clicked, it redirects to page Our mission.

You manage the structure of your website on Pages page. The following screenshot shows a typical hierarchy of pages (sitemap),
displayed on Pages page:

NOTE: On Pages page, if is displayed next to a page’s icon, it means that this page has subpages. You can expand and collapse
the group of pages, by clicking the arrow.

Section contents

You create and manage the hierarchy of pages, when you:

Create a child page

Move pages in the hierarchy


CREATING A CHILD PAGE
You can create a child page both of normal pages and of group pages.

1. On Pages page, you create a child of a page in the following ways:

14

 Using the function bar button.

a. Select the parent page of which you want to create a subpage.

b. Click Create a child of the selected page button.

 Using the Actions link.

a. Click the Actions link of the page of which you want to create a subpage.

b. In the dropdown menu, click Create a child page.

The Create a page page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a new page  Step 3 and Step 4.

NOTE: When you create a page using the above procedure, on Create a page page, in Under parent page… radio button and the
parent page, which you selected in Step 1, is automatically selected. You can change the parent page using the Change button.


MOVING PAGES IN THE HIERARCHY
You can move pages up and down on the same hierarchical level and assign pages to different parent pages on different level of
hierarchy. You move pages around the structure of pages using drag and drop.

You can also move pages without using drag and drop. For more information, see Moving pages without using drag and drop.

On Pages page, click a page and drag it to one of the following places:

 Inside another page.
The following screenshot shows dragging and dropping a page inside another page:

The dragged page becomes the last child of the page where you drop it.

 Between two pages
The following screenshot shows dragging and dropping a page between two pages:

15

The dragged page becomes a sibling of the pages, where you have dropped it.


MOVING PAGES WITHOUT USING DRAG AND DROP
You move pages up or down or change their parent to change the order in which they are displayed in the website navigation
without using drag and drop.

REORDERING PAGES ON THE SAME HIERARCHICAL LEVEL
1. To move a page up or down, on Pages page, click the Actions link of the respective page.

2. Select Up or Down respectively.
The system move the page one position up or down on the same hierarchical level, which the page was initially on.

You can only reorder subpages (children) of one parent page. You cannot move pages across different parent pages using the
Up and Down functions.
NOTE: If the page was last in the list of pages on its hierarchical level, you cannot move this page down; if it was first – you
cannot move it up.

MOVING PAGES ON DIFFERENT HIERARCHICAL LEVELS
To move a page on different hierarchical level, you change the parent of the page or you put the page at top level.

1. Click the Actions link of the page which you want to move.

2. From the dropdown menu click Title & Properties.
The Edit a page page appears.
Perform one of the following:

 If you want to move the page at top level, select At the top level radio button.

 If you want to change the parent page of the page, perform the following:

a. Under Under parent page… radio button, click Change.

b. From the treeview that appears, select the new parent page and click Done.

3. Click Save changes.
The system moves the page on the respective level, under the selected parent page.

| Moving pages in the hierarchy | Structuring the pages of your website | Creating and managing pages | Table of contents |

VIEWING VERSION HISTORY OF A PAGE
Use this function to view different versions of a page. Every time you edit a page, a version of this page is saved by the system.

To view the history, perform one of the following:

 On Pages page, click the Actions link of the respective page and click Revision History.

16

 In page content editing mode, in the function bar, click Revision History.

The Revision History page appears, containing a list of all versions of the page:

In case the page has been published, the system indicates which version of the page is published, by displaying next to this
version.

 You can view a previous version of the page by clicking the version.
A preview of the page opens. You can revert to a previous version of the page by clicking Revert to this version button in the
upper-left corner of the page.
The system makes the selected version of the page the current one.

 You can delete versions of the page, by selecting them and clicking Delete.

NOTE: You cannot delete the version that is currently published.

 You can add note to each version, by clicking the Write note link of the respective version.
An input field appears where you enter and save the note.
The note is displayed in the Revision History page. You can Edit and Delete the note.


SORTING AND FILTERING PAGES
The Pages page displays all created pages by all users.

FILTERING PAGES
In the right side of the page, under Filter pages, you can use the following filtering options:

 To filter pages created by you, click My pages.

 You can filter pages according to their status by clicking it.

 To display only pages with missing properties, click With no Titles, With no Descriptions, With no Keywords.

 To filter pages according to the date they were modified, click by Date modified…
The Display pages modified in… pane appears.

 When you click a time interval, the system displays all the pages modified during this time interval. The last modified are
the first in the list. You can change the sorting.

 To display pages modified during some custom period of time, click Custom range… link.
To define a custom filtering interval, use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup,
and the time picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup.
Click Filter.

 To go back to all filtering options, click Close dates link.
The system displays all filtering options, but displays the last filtering you have chosen until you choose something else or
until you refresh your screen by pressing F5.

NOTE: When you apply filtering to the pages, the system displays the result of the filtering in a list. The hierarchy of the pages is
not depicted. Under the name of the page, the system displays the name of the page’s parent page.

SORTING PAGES
Use the Sort pages dropdown box in the function bar of Pages page to sort the list of pages.

17

There are the following sorting options:

 by Hierarchy
The system displays pages in a treeview, using the original hierarchy which was defined.
This is the default display of Pages page.
When you select this option all previous sorting and filtering is removed.

 Last created on top
The system displays the last pages that were created on the top of the list.
You can use this sorting option on filtered pages.

 Last modified on top
The system displays the last pages that were modified on the top of the list.

 Alphabetically (A-Z) and Alphabetically (Z-A)
The system displays the pages in alphabetic order starting with A or with Z.

 Custom sorting…
A window appears where you perform the following:

1. Select sorting criterion from the dropdown box and choose between Ascending and Descending order in the radio button.

2. You can also and add more than one criterion by clicking Add another sorting rule link and you can remove sorting criteria
by clicking Remove link.

3. When you are finished, click Save.
The system sorts the pages according to the custom sorting.

4. To edit a custom sorting that you have created, select Edit custom sorting… from the Sort pages dropdown box.



SETTING PERMISSIONS FOR PAGES
You can set permission for all pages and you can set individual permissions for each page.

 To change the permissions for all pages, on Pages page, click Permissions for all pages link in the right side of the page.
The Permissions for all pages page appears.

For more information about changing permissions, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing Users,
Roles, and Permissions  Managing permissions Changing global and section permissions  Step 2 to Step 4.
 To set individual permissions for a certain page, on Pages page, click the Actions link of the page and click Permissions.

For more information, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing Users, Roles, and Permissions 
Managing permissions  Changing permissions of an individual item  Step 2 to Step 4.
When you are finished setting permissions, click Back to Pages link to return to Pages page.


OTHER FUNCTIONS FOR PAGES

MAKING A PAGE A HOMEPAGE
On Pages page, the homepage of your website is represented by icon.

For example, .

To make a page your homepage, on Pages page, click the Actions link of the respective page and click Set as Homepage.
The system sets the page as the website’s homepage and displays the icon above.

NOTE: If you do not explicitly set a page as homepage, the first page you have created is automatically set as your homepage.

18

IMPORTANT: You cannot delete the page set as homepage, unless it is the last page in the sitemap. To delete this page, set
another page as homepage.

SEARCHING FOR PAGES
1. To search for a particular page, on Pages page, click Search…
A search field appears.

2. Enter the name or part of the name of the page you want to find and click Search.
The system displays a list of all pages whose name contains the search word.

3. When finished searching, click Close search.

DELETE PAGES
To delete a page perform one of the following:

 On Pages page, select one or more pages to delete and click Delete button.

 On Pages page, click the Actions link of the page you want to delete and click Delete.

A dialog box appears where you must confirm the deletion.

IMPORTANT: When you delete a parent page, the system deletes the page and all of its children.

DUPLICATE PAGES
1. On Pages page, click the Actions link of the page you want to duplicate and click Duplicate.
The Create a page page appears containing all the properties of the page you are duplicating.

2. You can change some properties or create a new page with the same properties.

NOTE: You must change the URL of the duplicated page, because you cannot have more than one page with the same URL.
You can do that either by changing the name of the new page or by clicking Change button under URL and entering a new
URL for the duplicated page.

3. Click one of the following:

The page opens in page editing mode. It has the same content as the original page. You can change the content and
save the page in different status.

 Create and return to Pages
The duplicate page you have created has the same content as the original page and is saved in status Draft, regardless of
the status of the original page.

For more information, see Creating a new page.

CHANGING THE OWNER OF A PAGE
1. On Pages page, click the Actions link of the page and click Owner.
A list of users appears.

2. Select the new owner and click Done.


EDITING YOUR PAGE LAYOUT
Before you populate your page with content, you create a layout that helps the display of content. For example you allocate space
for the navigation, the title, and the content blocks. To do this you use predefined or custom templates, which you can modify if
needed.

Section contents

To create your page layout, you do the following:

Apply a template to a page
Use this procedure if you have not selected a template for your page during its creation or if you want to change the selected
template. See how you can upload a custom template.

19

Applying a theme to a page
Use this procedure to apply a theme to a page. See how you can upload your own themes.

Modify the layout
Use this procedure to customize the template which you have selected for the page. You can add columns, change their size,
and more.


APPLYING A TEMPLATE TO A PAGE
If you have not selected a layout template when creating the page or if you want to change the template you have selected,
perform one of the following:

1. Select a template in one of the following ways:

 On Pages page, click the Actions link of the page, whose template you want to change, click Template.

 In page content editing mode, click Layout button in the function bar and, in the lower-right corner of the page, click
Select another template… button.
The Select a template page appears, containing both predefined and custom layout templates.

2. Perform one of the following:

 Click one of the templates displayed.
You can customize or change the layout template later.
For more information, see Editing your page layout.

 Upload your own .master file by clicking Use your own .master file.
Select a master file from the App_Master folder and click Use Selected.
To select a master file from another folder, in the upper-right corner of the window, click Browse other folders button.

For more information about .master files, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Creating a template  Creating a template
using Master pages.
For more information about the App_Master folder, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Website templates file structure.

For more information about using custom templates, see Creating or uploading a custom template.

3. Click Done.
The template is applied to the page.

CAUTION: If you want to change the existing layout template of a page, the system replaces the old template with the new one.
If you have made any changes to the page or added content widgets, all the information is lost and you start editing your page
from the beginning. This is not true only in case you have chosen Don’t use template. In this case all modifications of layout and
content are preserved and the new layout is appended to the existing.

| Editing you page layout | Table of contents |

CREATING OR UPLOADING A CUSTOM TEMPLATE
If the predefined templates of Sitefinity do not suit your design, you can create a custom template using Sitefinity or you can
upload an already created template and use it.

CREATING A CUSTOM TEMPLATE
If the predefined templates do not suit your style, you can create a new template.

1. In the main menu, click Design  Page Templates.
A list of existing templates appears.

2. Click Create a template button in the function bar.
The Create a template page appears.

3. In Name input field, enter a name for the new template,

4. In Template radio button group, select one of the following:

 Use template

20

Select this if you want to create a template based on an existing template.

 Don’t use template
Select this if you want to start from scratch.

For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Creating a template  Creating a template using the Layout editor.

UPLOADING A CUSTOM TEMPLATE
If you have a ready template, which you want to apply to a page, you can upload it and use it.

For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Creating a template  Creating a template using Master pages.

| Applying a template to a page | Editing you page layout | Table of contents |

APPLYING A THEME TO A PAGE
If you have an already created ready theme, you can upload it in Sitefinity and apply it to one or more pages or templates.

To apply a theme to your page, perform the following:

1. Open the page in content editing mode.

2. Click Theme button in the upper-right corner of the page.
The Theme pane appears, containing a dropdown box with all installed themes.

3. Select a theme from the dropdown box.
The theme is applied to the page.

NOTE: You can apply a theme to a page by applying the theme to the template which the page uses.

For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Creating a theme.


MODIFYING THE LAYOUT
After you have chosen a layout template for your page, you can modify it to add more layout elements or edit the already added
elements.

You can modify the layout template, if you need more columns to present the information you want. You modify the layout using
Layout elements. Each layout element splits the box where you drop it into columns.
Section contents

You can modify the layout in page content editing mode.

Adding layout elements
Use this procedure to add layout elements that split the template element into columns.

Editing layout elements
Use this procedure to modify the columns you have added.


ADDING LAYOUT ELEMENTS
1. In page content editing mode, click Layout button in the upper-right corner of the page.
A list of layout elements appears.

2. Drag and drop a layout element in a box from the page layout.
The following screenshot shows dragging and dropping of a layout element in an empty screen element:

21

NOTE: You can drag and drop a layout element outside a box from the layout template, which you are using. Select an
element and drag it to the desires place. The system suggests you where you can drop the layout element.

3. If you need to further split a box into columns, you can nest layout elements.

| Modifying the layout | Editing you page layout | Table of contents |

EDITING LAYOUT ELEMENTS
To edit a predefined layout element, click Edit at the upper-right corner of the element.
The Edit layout element box appears where you can perform the following:

MODIFY COLUMN WIDTH
The following screenshot shows the two ways you can change column width – by dragging the columns’ border or by entering
widths in the input fields:

To modify column width, perform the following:

1. Click Sizes tab.
In section Widths, a number of input fields appear. The number of input fields corresponds to the number of columns you
have chosen – from one to five.

2. Choose the unit of measurement between percentages and pixels in Show sizes in radio button.

3. In Column 1 input field, enter the desired column width for the first column in the chosen unit of measurement.
If you have chosen a layout with more than two columns, you must enter the width for all of them except for the last one
which is automatically calculated by the system.

22

EXAMPLE: If you have chosen a layout element with three columns, you must enter the size for Column 1 and Column 2. You
cannot enter in Column 3 – the size of the third column is automatically calculated.

You can change the automatically calculated column by performing the following:

d. Click Change auto-sized column.

e. Click Make this auto-sized link of the column you want to be automatically calculated.

f. Click Cancel changing auto-sized column.

4. You can resize the width of the columns by dragging their borders.
In the layout element at the left, grab the line dividing the columns and grad it to the desired place.
In each column, the system displays the width in the chosen unit of measurement.

MODIFY SPACING BETWEEN COLUMNS
1. To modify spaces between columns, click Spaces and choose the unit of measurement between percentages and pixels in
Show spaces in radio button.
2. You can specify the following types of spaces:

 Space between columns
 Space above and below columns
3. Enter the spaces in the chosen unit of measurement
The system applies equal spaces to all columns. You can adjust spaces between columns individually by clicking Individual
spaces per column link.
For each column you can specify individual spacing on the Top, Right, Bottom, and Left.

ASSiGNING CLASSES TO COLUMNS
You can choose a new or change the class name for each column if later you want to set a CSS style for this particular column.

When you finish with editing sizes, spaces, and classes, click Done button.

After you have created the layout, you can add content widgets to each box.
For more information, see Displaying content using widgets.

| Modifying the layout | Editing you page layout | Table of contents |

CREATING AND UPLOADING CONTENT
After you have created the layout of your page, you proceed with populating the page with content. To display content you use
widgets. The widgets are controls which you drop on the page (in page content editing mode) and configure them to display
already existing content. If you do not create content first, the widgets have nothing to display.

You create content using the content modules on the Content tab. The content you create using content modules is reusable –
once you create news, an event, or other content item, it is stored in the Sitefinity project and other users can view, use, and edit
that content.

You display the content you have created with these content modules using the widgets. You can configure the widgets to display
different part of content, by combining widgets and by tagging and classifying content.
For more information about using widgets, see Displaying content using widgets.

Section contents

Using the content modules
Use this procedure to create reusable content items, such as news and events, or to upload images and videos. Use it to
manage permission for each content item and to publish them on the website.

Creating and editing content while browsing the website
Use this procedure to create, edit, and upload content while you are browsing the website. You do not need to open the
website in the backend; you can use the inline editing function to edit your website directly while browsing it.

Viewing version history of a content item
Use this procedure to view and compare different versions of a content item.

Managing comments for content items

23

Use this procedure to hide and publish, edit and delete comments that are left for content items on the website.

Adding custom fields to content items
Use this procedure to add a custom field to a content item, such as news, events, or images. A custom field is a field that you
create.

Using the text editor
Use this procedure to learn how to use the functions of the Text Editor. Use the editor to enter and format text, tables, and
more. You can also insert already created text.

Classifying your content
Use this procedure to classify the content items you have created by categorizing and tagging them. Classify your content
items helps you organize them and you can use tags and categories to filter the content items when displaying them.

Translating content items or classifications
Use this procedure to create a new language translation of an existing content item or classification.

Creating and editing feeds
Use feeds to publish frequently updated information. You can publish an RSS or Atom feed for a blog, news, or events on the
website and the users can subscribe to this feed. This way they will receive updates of that blog, news, or events without
having to visit the website.

Defining search indexes
You use search indexes to define different sets of content to be searched, using the internal search of your website. To
configure your website’s internal search, you must first define a search index and then drop the Search and Search results
widget somewhere on your website.


USING THE CONTENT MODULES
The content modules are located under the content tab. Use the Content tab to create reusable content. Once you create news, an
event, or other content item, it is stored in the Sitefinity project and other users can view, use, and edit this content. The content
items are displayed on one or more pages of your website using widgets. Each content item has a widget that is used to display
only that specific content item. For example, the events are displayed on the website using Events widget.
For more information about using widgets, see Displaying content using widgets.

The content tab has the following dropdown menu, displaying all content modules:

Section contents

In Sitefinity you can create and use the following types of content (alphabetically ordered):

Blogs and blog posts
Use this content type to create blogs, in which you create blog posts.

Content blocks
Use this section to create content blocks when you need to display various kinds of nonspecific information (all information
different than the predefined content types, such as news or event announcements). Content blocks are very useful when you
need to create text that will be used on many pages of your website. For example, company address.

24

You create content blocks using the text editor.

Documents and files
Use this section to upload and organize documents, links to which you can then display on pages of the website.
You can also insert links to uploaded documents in the text editor.

Events
Use this content type to create events to be announced on the website.

Forms
Use this section to create custom forms to be displayed on the website.

Images
Use this section to upload and organize images, which you can then display on pages of the website individually or in galleries.
You can also insert uploaded images in the text editor.

Lists
Use this section to create lists and list items. You can use lists for various purposes. For example, you can create a list for your
FAQ section.

News
Use this content type to create all kind of news.

Newsletters
Use newsletters module to create newsletters, manage lists of subscribers to newsletters, and to create and test newsletter
campaigns.

Videos
Use this section to upload and organize videos, which you can then display on pages of the website individually or in galleries.
You can also insert uploaded videos in the text editor.

After you have created a content item you can make it visible on the website, you can manage comments for that item or set
specific permission.

| Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

CREATING AND EDITING BLOGS AND BLOG POSTS
You manage blogs and their posts on the Blogs page.

To open the Blogs page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Blogs.
The Blogs page appears, displaying a list of all created blogs with the number of posts in each blog and the date of the last post
together with actions you can perform on them.

When you open a blog you can view all posts in this blog.
To open the page with a blog’s posts, perform one of the following:

 On Blogs page, click the blog which post you want to view.

 On Blogs page, click Edit posts link of the respective blog.

A page, displaying all posts in the selected blog, appears.
To navigate back to Blogs page, click All blogs link in the upper-left part of the page.

Section contents

On this page you can do the following:

Create a blog

Edit blogs

Search and filter blogs

Create a blog post

Edit blog posts

Search and filter blog posts

Create and editing blog posts using Windows Live Writer

COMMENTS FOR POSTS

25

On the page with all the posts for a blog, you can view all comments for a particular post by clicking the number in Comments
column of the respective blog.
All comments that have been submitted for this post appear.

For more information about comments, see Managing comments for content items.

PERMISSIONS FOR BLOGS AND BLOG POSTS
You can set permission for all blogs and blog posts and you can set individual permissions for each blog or blog post.

 To change the permissions for all blogs, on Blogs page, click Permissions link in the right side of the page.
The Permissions for posts page appears.

 To change the permissions for all blog posts, on the blog post page, click Permissions for posts in the right side of the page.

For more information about changing permissions, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing users,
roles, and permissions  Managing permissions  Changing global and section permissions  Step 2 to Step 4.
For more information about setting individual permissions, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing users,
roles, and permissions  Managing permissions  Changing permissions of an individual item.

CUSTOM FIELDS FOR BLOGS AND BLOG POSTS
You can add a custom field to all blogs or to all posts. A custom field is a field that you create. For each blog and blog post there
are default fields, such as author, title, etc. If you need to add different than the already existing fields, you must create a custom
field.
For more information, see Adding custom fields to content items.

You then display a custom field for blog posts on your website by adding it to a template for displaying blog posts.
For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget templates editor  Creating
and editing widget templates.

DISPLAYING BLOGS POSTS ON YOUR WEBSITE
To display blog posts on your website, you must use the Blog posts widget and you must configure it.
For more information, see Configuring the Blog posts widget.
For more information about adding widgets on your page, see Adding widgets on your page.

You can then choose the way blog posts are displayed by changing the template which the Blog posts widget uses.

| Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

CREATING A BLOG
1. On Blogs page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any blogs, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more blogs, the system displays a list all created blogs and the following button in the
function bar of Blogs page:

2. Click Create a blog.
The Create a blog page appears.

3. In Title, enter the title for the blog.

4. Under Default page, you select the page, in which the blog opens by default.
Click Select a page button, select a page from the sitemap, and click Done.
This page is also used when an RSS link to this blog is clicked and by Windows Live Writer to associate blog posts with a
particular page.

26

5. You can change the automatically generated URL of the blog by clicking Change button under Blog URL and entering the new
URL in the input field that appears.

6. To allow or forbid comments for the blog, select or deselect the Allow comments checkbox.
If you have selected the checkbox, under Who can post comments, select one of the following:

 Anyone
 Only registered users
If you want comments not to be publically visible until the responsible user publishes them, select Comments have to be
approved before appear on the site checkbox.
If you select this checkbox, comments that are left on the website are initially saved in status Hidden.

7. You can choose if you want an RSS feed to be generated for this blog by clicking Alternative publishing (RSS) and selecting
RSS feed checkbox.
Feeds are used to publish frequently updated information, such as blogs, news, etc. You can publish an RSS or Atom feed for
the blog on the website and the users can subscribe to this feed. This way they will receive updates of the blog without having
to visit the website.

You can change the settings of the automatically generated RSS feed.
Click Change button and perform procedure Creating a feed  Step 7a to Step 7e.

You can display the RSS feed for the blog using the Feed widget.
For more information, see Configuring the Feed widget.

8. If you have added any custom fields for blogs, the Custom fields section, displaying all created fields, appears.

IMPORTANT: Some of the above fields may not be displayed when you create a blog, because they have been hidden.

For more information about creating custom fields and hiding default fields, see Adding custom fields to content items.

9. Click Create this blog.
The system creates the blog and takes you to create posts in this blog.

 If you want to create a blog post now, click Create a post.
For more information about how to create blog posts, see Creating a blog post.

 If you want to go back to Blogs page, without creating a post, click All blogs link at the upper-left part of the page.

| Creating and editing blogs and blog posts | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING BLOGS
EDITING THE PROPERTIES OF A BLOG
1. Open a blog for editing in one of the following ways:

 On Blogs page click the Actions link of the respective blog.
From the dropdown list click Title & Properties.

 On the blog’s posts page, click Title & Properties link on the right.

The Edit a blog page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a blog  Step 2 to Step 6 and Step 8.


DELETING BLOGS
You can delete a blog in the following ways:

 On Blogs page, select one or more blogs and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Blogs page, click the Actions link of the respective blog.
From the dropdown list, click Delete.

 On Edit a blog page, click More actions  Delete.



27

SEARCHING AND FILTERING BLOGS
SEARCHING FOR BLOGS
To search for a particular blog, use the search option.

1. Click the Search… button in the function bar.
A search field opens.

2. Enter the name or part of the name of the blog you are searching for.
The search field is case insensitive.

3. Click Search.
A list of results matching your search appears.
To return to the list of all items, click Close search button in the function bar.

FILTERING BLOGS
To display blogs, created only by your user, in the right side of the Blogs page, click My blogs link under Filter blogs.

You can also filter only the blogs that have no posts in them by clicking Blogs without posts.


CREATING A BLOG POST
1. On Blogs page perform one of the following:

 Click Create a post link under the name of the blog.

 Click the blog.
The blog posts page appears, displaying one of the following:

 If you have not created any posts, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first blog post you create is in the default language.

 If you have already created one or more posts, the system displays a list all created posts and the following button in
the function bar of the page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating a blog post, you must first choose the language in
which you want to create the post. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


2. Click Create a post button.
The Create a post page appears.

3. In the Title input field, enter the title of the post.

4. In the text editor enter the post itself.
For more information, see Using the text editor.

5. In Summary input field, you can enter a summery for the post.

6. You can classify your blog post using the Categories and tags section.
For more information, see Adding categories and tags to a content item.
Classifying content helps you organize it. For more information about classifications, see Classifying your content.

7. By clicking More options, you can change the following:

 The automatically generated URL of the post.
To change it, click Change and enter a new URL name.

 Allow or forbid comments.
To allow or forbid users to leave comments about the post, select or deselect the Allow comments checkbox.

28

 Configure multiple URLs for the blog post

a. To configure a blog post to have more than one URL, select Allow multiple URLs for this item... checkbox.

b. In the input box, enter the additional URLs that you want this blog post to have.

c. If you want all the URLs that you have entered to point to the default URL of the post, select All additional URLs
redirect to the default one checkbox.
If you uncheck the checkbox, each URL will display the blog post without redirecting.

8. If you have added any custom fields for blog posts, the Custom fields section, displaying all created fields, appears.

IMPORTANT: Some of the above fields may not be displayed when you create a blog posts, because they have been hidden.


9. When you are finished creating the blog post, you must set its status, using the buttons on top and at the bottom of the blog
post. For more information, see Setting the status of a new page or content item.

NOTE: While creating you blog post, you can use the Preview button to see a preview of the blog post and its properties.


EDITING BLOG POSTS
EDITING, APPROVING, AND PUBLISHING THE CONTENT OF A BLOG POST
1. Go to the blog’s post page and open a blog post for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the blog post you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective post.
From the dropdown list, click Content.

The Edit a post page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a blog post  Step 3 to Step 8.

3. When you are finished, perform one of the following:

 If you have opened for editing a blog post in status Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected, perform procedure Managing a page
or content item that is Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected.

 If you have opened for approving a blog post in status Awaiting approval, perform procedure Managing a page or content

 If you have opened for publishing a blog post in status Awaiting publishing, perform procedure Managing a page or
content item that is Awaiting publishing.

 If you have opened for editing a blog post in status Published or Scheduled, perform procedures Managing a page or
content item that is Published or Managing a page or content item that is Scheduled respectively.
If you are editing a published blog post, the system saves a draft of that news, but the published version is still visible on
the webpage. To see which version is the currently published one, see Revision History.

UNPUBLISHING AND SCHEDULING A PUBLISHED POST
After a blog post has been published, you can change the status of the blog post.
For more information, see Managing a page or content item that is Published.

DELETING POSTS
You can delete posts in the following ways:

 On blog’s post page, select one or more blog posts and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On blog’s post page, click the Actions link of the respective post.



29

SEARCHING AND FILTERING BLOG POSTS
SEARCHING FOR BLOG POSTS
To search for a particular post, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the post you are searching for.

3. Click Search.

FILTERING BLOG POSTS
To display posts, created only by your user, in the right side of the page, click My posts link under Filter posts.

You can also filter posts by categories, tags, or status.

To filter posts according to the date they were modified, click by Date modified…

 When you click a time interval, the system displays all the posts updated during this time interval. The last updated are the
first in the list.

 To display posts modified during some custom period of time, click Custom range… link.
To define a custom filtering interval, use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup, and
the time picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup.
Click Filter.

The system displays all filtering options, but displays the last filtering you have chosen until you choose something else or until
you refresh your screen by pressing F5.


CREATING AND EDITING BLOG POSTS USING WINDOWS LIVE WRITER
Windows Live Writer is a desktop application for publishing blog posts. You can use Windows Live Writer to create and publish
blog posts in Sitefinity. It allows you to create, edit, and manage blog posts without having to login to Sitefinity and using a web
browser.

PREREQUISITES: To use Live Writer with Sitefinity you must have created a blog and added the Blog posts widget to a published
page. You must set the page as Default page for that blog. For more information about setting default page, see Creating a blog 
Step 4.
You must also have the proper permission to create, view, and modify blogs and posts, image albums, and classifications. For more
information about permissions, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Manage users, roles, and permissions 
Manage permissions.

SETTING UP WINDOWS LIVE WRITER
1. In Sitefinity main menu, click Administration  Settings.

2. On the Basic Settings page that appears, click Advanced.

3. In the tree on the left, click Blogs.

4. Select AllowBlogging checkbox and click Save changes.

5. Download and install Window Live Writer from http://explore.live.com/windows-live-writer?os=other.

NOTE: You do not need to install all Windows Live Essentials. You need to install only the Writer.

6. Open Windows Live Writer.
If this is the first time you open it, you are asked whether you want to add a blog account.

7. In What blog service to use? window, select Other services, and click Next.

8. In Web address of your blog, enter the URL of the page, where your blog is published.

30

9. Enter the credentials you use to login to Sitefinity, select Remember my password checkbox, and click Next.
If you have more than one blog, select the blog where you want to post.
Later you can setup to post in more than one blogs using Windows Live Writer.

The wizard asks you if you want to download the theme of the page containing your blog. This way you will be able to see a
preview of the posts you write.

10. Select the image album where images added to your post will be stored.
If there is more than one album, click the one with the name of the blog, which you have selected.
The album is automatically created in Sitefinity and images are uploaded in this album.

11. Enter a nickname for the blog and click Finish.
Your blog is saved and you can use Windows Live Writer to publish posts in it. All posts you published with Windows Live
Writer are also stored in Sitefinity.

For more information about setting up and using Windows Live Writer, visit Windows Live Writer Help Center at
http://explore.live.com/windows-live-writer-help-center.


CREATING AND EDITING CONTENT BLOCKS
You create content blocks when you need to display various kinds of nonspecific information (all information different than the
predefined content types, such as news or event announcements). Content blocks are very useful when you need to create text
that will be used on many pages of your website. For example, company address.

You manage content blocks on the Content blocks shared across pages page.

To open the page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Content blocks.
The Content blocks shared across pages page appears, displaying a list of all created content blocks together with actions you can
perform on them.
Use this page to create, edit, and manage shared content blocks, which you can then reuse on as many pages as needed.

Section contents


Create a content block

Edit content blocks

Search and filter content blocks

DISPLAYING CONTENT BLOCKS YOUR WEBSITE
To display content blocks on your website, you must use the Content block widget and you must configure it.
For more information, see Configuring the Content block widget.

You can then choose the way blocks are displayed by changing the template which the Content block widget uses.


CREATING A CONTENT BLOCK
1. On Content blocks shared across pages page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any content blocks, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first content bock you create is in the default language. If you have
already created one or more content blocks, the system displays a list all created content blocks and the following button
in the function bar of the page:

31

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating a content block, you must first choose the language in
which you want to create it. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


2. Click Create a content block.
The Create a content block page appears.

3. In Title, enter a title for the content.

4. In the text editor, enter the content itself.

5. To save your work, click Create this content block.
Your shared content block is created and you can display it on as many pages as needed, using the Content block widget.

| Creating and editing content blocks | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING CONTENT BLOCKS

EDITING THE CONTENT OF A CONTENT BLOCK
1. Go to the Content blocks shared across pages page and open a content block for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the content block you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective content block.

The Edit a content block page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a content block  Step 3 to Step 4.


DELETING A CONTENT BLOCK
You can delete a content block in the following ways:

 On Content blocks shared across pages page, select one or more content blocks and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Content blocks shared across pages page, click the Actions link of the respective content block.

STATUS OF PAGES AFTER EDITING A SHARED CONTENT BLOCK
The following table displays the behaviors of pages that contain the edited or deleted shared content block. The behavior depends
on the workflow type that you are using:

Page in Standard lifecycle Approval before publishing 2 levels of approval before
status: management workflow publishing workflow

Draft, Page is updated and its status Page is updated and its status Page is updated and its status
Rejected, set to Draft. set to Draft. set to Draft.
Unpublished

Draft Page is updated and its status Page is updated and its status Page is updated and its status
(newer than set to Draft (newer than set to Draft (newer than set to Draft (newer than
published) published). published). published).

Scheduled Page is updated and its status Page is updated and its status Page is updated and its status
set to Draft. set to Draft, only if you are set set to Draft, only if you are set
as approver. as second level of approver.

Published Page is updated and its status The published version is not The published version is not
is still Published. updated. The page is saved as updated. The page is saved as
Draft (newer than published) Draft (newer than published)

32

and this draft is updated, only if and this draft is updated, only if
you are set as approver. you are set as approver.

Awaiting N/A Page is updated and its status Page is updated and its status
approval set to Draft, only if you are set set to Draft, only if you are set
as approver. as first level of approver.

Awaiting N/A N/A Page is updated and its status
publishing set to Draft, only if you are set
as second level of approver.



SEARCHING AND FILTERING CONTENT BLOCKS

SEARCHING FOR CONTENT BLOCKS
To search for a particular content block, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the block you are searching for.

3. Click Search.

FILTER CONTENT BLOCKS
To display content blocks, created only by your user, in the right side of the page, click My content blocks link under Filter shared
content.
You can filter content blocks that are not displayed on any page.

You can also filter items by the pages on which there is shared content.


UPLOADING AND EDITING DOCUMENTS AND FILES
You manage documents and files on the Documents & Files page.

To open the Documents & Files page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Documents & Files.
The Documents & Files page appears, displaying a list of all uploaded documents or files together with actions you can perform on
them.
Use this page to upload, edit, and manage documents or files.

Section contents


Upload documents and files

Edit documents and files

Sort, filter, and find documents and files

Manage document and file libraries

PERMISSIONS FOR DOCUMENTS, FILES AND LIBRARIES
You can set permission for all documents, files, and libraries and you can set individual permissions for each document, file, or
library.

To change the permissions for all documents and files, on Documents & Files page, click Permissions link in the right side of the
page.

33

The Permissions for Documents page appears.
To change permissions for all albums and libraries, in the main menu, click Administration  Permissions  by Section 
Libraries.
For more information about changing permissions, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing users, roles,
and permissions  Managing permissions  Changing global and section permissions  Step 2 to Step 4.
For more information about setting individual permissions for documents, files, and libraries, see Sitefinity Installation and
Administration Guide  Managing users, roles, and permissions  Managing permissions  Changing permissions of an individual
item.

CUSTOM FIELDS FOR DOCUMENTS AND FILES
You can add a custom field to all documents and files. A custom field is a field that you create. For each document or file there are
default fields, such as author, title, etc. If you need to add different than the already existing fields, you must create a custom
field.

You then display a custom field on your website by adding it to a template for displaying documents and files.

DISPLAYING DOCUMENTS AND FILES ON YOUR WEBSITE
To display the documents and files you have uploaded on your website, you must use the Document link widget and the Download
list widget and configure them to display the document or file.
For more information, see Configuring the Document link widget and Configuring the Download list widget.

You can then choose the way documents and files are displayed by changing the template which the Document link and Download
list widget uses.

LINKING OR EMBEDDING A DOCUMENT OR FILE
On Documents & Files page click Embed link to this file link of the respective document or file.

 To link a document or file, copy the content of the Link input field.
For example you can copy the link and paste it in an e-mail.

 To embed a link to a document or file in HTML, copy the content of the Embed field and paste it in HTML code.
For example, you can embed a link to a document in the text, using the text editor in HTML mode.


UPLOADING DOCUMENTS AND FILES
1. On Documents & Files page perform one of the following:

 If you have not uploaded any documents or files, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first document or file you upload is in the default language.

 If you have already uploaded one or more documents or files, the system displays all uploaded documents and files and
the following button in the function bar of Documents & Files page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before uploading a document or file, you must first choose the language
in which you want to create the document or file. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the
page.

34


1. Click Upload documents or other files.
The Upload documents or other files page appears.

2. Click Select documents or other files.

3. Browse your computer to find the document or file you want to upload and click Open.
You can select more than one document or file.
The name of the document or file and its size appear in Upload documents or other files page.

4. To upload more documents or files, click Add more and repeat Step 4.

5. In Where to store uploaded documents or other files? dropdown box, select the library where you want to store the
document(s) or file(s).
If you have not created any libraries, you can only choose Default Library, which exists by default.
If you want to create more libraries, you must go back to Libraries page and create a library.
For more information about creating libraries, see Managing document and file libraries.

6. You can classify your documents and files using the Categories and tags section.

7. When you are finished, perform procedure Setting the status of a new page or content item.
Uploading status bars appear on the page and after the system has uploaded the documents or files, a massage appears
informing you about the result of the upload.

8. When upload is finished, choose between the following:

 View all items
Returns you to Documents & Files page.

 Upload more documents or other files
The system opens Upload documents or other files page, where you can upload new documents and files.
Perform Step 3 to Step 8.

NOTE: If you are in multilingual mode, on Documents & Files page, the system displays all available languages next to the
document or file. You cannot have different documents or files in different languages, but you can have different titles for each
language. To do this, click the Add link of the respective icon.

NOTE: On Documents & Files page you can also download an already uploaded document or file, by clicking its Actions link and
then Download.

| Uploading and editing documents and files | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING THE PROPERTIES OF DOCUMENTS AND FILES
EDITING PROPERTIES AND ADDING DETAILS TO A DOCUMENT OR FILE
1. To edit and add details to an already uploaded document or file, on Documents & Files page perform one of the following:

 Click the document or file you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective document or file and then click Edit Properties.

The Edit properties page appears.

2. Change the title, by entering the new title in Title input field.

3. Open the document or file with the respective program by clicking Open the file button below the Title input field.

4. Replace the document or file with another by clicking Replace the file button bellow the Title input field.
The Select document or other file link appears. Click it and browse your computer to find the document or file with which you
want to replace and click Open.
The system replaces only the document or file, but not its title and other properties.

5. Change the library which the document or file belongs to, by clicking Change library button and selecting the new library from
the dropdown box that appears.

6. Change the categories and the tags which the document or file is assigned to, by clicking Categories and tags.

35

7. To add details to the document or file, click Details.
The following options appear:

 Author
Enter an author of the document or file.

 Description
 Other details
You can enter additional information about the document or file.

8. You can change the URL of the document or file by clicking Advanced.
The automatically generated URL of the document or file appears.

9. If you have added any custom fields for documents and files, the Custom fields section, displaying all created fields, appears.

IMPORTANT: Some of the above fields may not be displayed when you edit the properties of a document or file, because
they have been hidden.



 If you have opened for editing a document or file in status Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected, perform procedure Managing
a page or content item that is Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected.

 If you have opened for approving a document or file in status Awaiting approval, perform procedure Managing a page or
content item that is Awaiting approval.

 If you have opened for publishing a document or file in status Awaiting publishing, perform procedure Managing a page or

 If you have opened for editing a document or file in status Published or Scheduled, perform procedures Managing a page
or content item that is Published or Managing a page or content item that is Scheduled respectively.
If you are editing a published document or file, the system saves a draft of it, but the published version is still visible on

EDIT TITLES OF MANY DOCUMENTS AND FILES AT THE SAME TIME
You can edit the properties of many documents and files at the same time. To do this, perform the following:

1. On Documents & Files page, select the documents or files you want to edit and click More actions  Bulk edit titles,
categories, tags.
The Bulk edit page appears displaying all the selected documents and files.

2. You can apply the following to all selected documents and files:

 Common library
Click Change library and select a library from the dropdown box that appears.
All documents and files are moved to that library.

 Common categories
Click Click to add common categories link.
For more information, see Adding categories.

 Common tags
Click Click to add common tags.
For more information, see Adding tags.

3. For each of the selected videos, you can change the following:

 Title
 Description
4. When finished, click Save changes.
The system returns you to Documents & Files page.

PUBLISHING, MOVING, AND DELETING A DOCUMENT OR FILE
 Unpublishing and scheduling a published document or file.
After a document or file had been published, you can change its status.

36


 To move one or more documents or files to another library, on Documents & Files page, select the documents and the files
and in the function bar click More actions  Move to other library.
A window appears where you select the library where you want to move the document(s) or file(s) and click Move.

 To delete a document or file, perform one of the following:

 On Documents & Files page, select one or more documents or files you want to delete and click Delete button in the
function bar.

 On Documents & Files page, click the Actions link of the document or file you want to delete and then click Delete.



SORTING, FILTERING, AND FINDING DOCUMENTS AND FILES
The Documents & Files page displays all uploaded document and files by all users and from all libraries.

DISPLAY DOCUMENTS AND FILES BY LIBRARIES
To display documents and files only from a specific library, click the library thumbnail in the right side of Documents & Files page.

NOTE: A link to the library, which the document or file belongs to, appears in the grid. If you click the link to the library, all
documents and files from this library appear.
For more information, see Managing document and file libraries.

FILTER DOCUMENTS AND FILES
To display documents and files, uploaded only by your user, in the right side of Documents & Files page, click My items link under
Filter Documents & Files.
You can also filter documents and files by categories, tags, or status, using Other filter options in the right side of Documents &
Files page.
To filter documents and files according to the date they were modified, click by Date …
The Display items modified in… pane appears.

 When you click a time interval, the system displays all documents and files modified during this time interval. The last modified
are the first in the list. You can change the sorting.

 To display documents and files modified during some custom period of time, click Custom range… link.
Click Filter.


SORT DOCUMENTS AND FILES
You can sort documents and files using the Sort items: dropdown box in the function bar of the page.

 Last uploaded on top
Sorts documents and files in ascending order according to the time of upload.

Sorts documents and files in ascending order according to time of modification.





37

The system sorts the documents and files according to the custom sorting.

4. To edit a custom sorting that you have created, select Edit custom sorting… from the Sort items: dropdown box.

SEARCHING FOR DOCUMENTS AND FILES
To search for a particular document or file, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the document or file you are searching for.

3. Click Search.
To return to the list of all documents and files, click Close search button in the function bar.


MANAGING DOCUMENT AND FILE LIBRARIES
DISPLAYING DOCUMENT AND FILE LIBRARIES
1. To display and manage all created libraries, go to Documents & Files page.

1. In the right side of the page, under Items by Library, click Manage libraries link.
The Libraries page appears where you can view and manage all libraries.

DISPLAYING AND EDITING THE DOCUMENTS AND FILES IN A LIBRARY
1. You can display all documents and files in a library in one of the following ways:

 On Libraries page, click the library which documents and files you want to display.
All documents and files in the library appear.

 On Documents & Files page, click the library thumbnail in the right side of page.
The system displays all the documents and files from the selected library together with the Library actions link.

2. To edit the documents or the files in the library, perform procedure Editing the properties of documents and files.

3. To go back to all documents and files, click All items in the right side of the page or from the main menu in the upper part of
the screen, click Content  Documents & Files.

CREATING A DOCUMENT AND FILE LIBRARY
1. On Libraries page or on Documents & Files page, click Create a library button in the function bar.
The Create a library page appears.

NOTE: If you have not uploaded any documents or files yet, on Documents & Files page, the Create a library link appears in
the center of the screen, under the Upload a document or file link.

2. Enter a name for the library.

3. To add a description of the library, click Click to add a description.

NOTE: The information you provide here is not public, it is for your reference only.

4. You can define the maximum size of the library and of each document and file in the library by clicking Advanced.
The Max library size and the Max document/file size input fields appear where you enter the limit of the size in MB and KB
respectively.

5. You can change the URL of the library by clicking Advanced.
The automatically generated URL of the library appears.

6. When you are finished, click one of the following:

 Create this library
The system creates the library and returns you to Libraries page or Documents & Files page, depending on where you
have started creating the library.

 Create and add another library
The system saves the library and displays a new Create a library page.

38

 The Back to link
The system does not save the library you were working on and returns you to Libraries page or Documents & Files page,
depending on where you have started creating the library.

EDITING DOCUMENT AND FILE LIBRARIES
1. To edit the library properties, on Libraries page click the Actions link of the library you want to edit.

1. From the dropdown box, click Edit Properties.
The Edit a library page appears.

2. Perform Step 2 to Step 5 of the above procedure.

The system returns you to Libraries page.

DELETING DOCUMENT AND FILE LIBRARIES
To delete a library, perform one of the following:

 On Libraries page, select one or more libraries you want to delete and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Libraries page, click the Actions link of the library you want to delete and then click Delete.

 On Edit a library page, click More actions  Delete.



CREATING AND EDITING EVENTS
You manage events on the Events page.

To open the Events page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Events.
The Events page appears, displaying a list of all created events together with actions you can perform on them.
Use this page to create, edit, and manage events.

Section contents


Create an event

Edit events

Search and filter events

COMMENTS FOR EVENTS
On Events page, you can view all the comments for events by clicking Comments for events link on the right side of the page.
All comments that have been submitted for all the events appear.


PERMISSIONS FOR EVENTS
You can set permission for all events and you can set individual permissions for each event.

To change the permissions for all events, on Events page, click Permissions link in the right side of the page.
The Permissions page appears.

CUSTOM FIELDS FOR EVENTS
You can add a custom field to all events. A custom field is a field that you create. For each event there are default fields, such as
author, title, etc. If you need to add different than the already existing fields, you must create a custom field.

39

You then display a custom field on your website by adding it to a template for displaying events.

DISPLAYING EVENTS ON YOUR WEBSITE
To display events on your website, you must use the Events widget and you must configure it.
For more information, see Configuring the Events widget.

You can then choose the way events are displayed by changing the template which the Events widget uses.


CREATING AN EVENT
1. On Events page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any events, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first event you create is in the default language.

 If you have already created one or more events, the system displays a list of all created events and the following button
in the function bar of Events page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating an event, you must first choose the language in which
you want to create the event. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


2. Click Create an event.
The Create an event page appears.

3. In the Title input field, describe the event.

4. In the text editor enter information for the event.

5. To schedule the starting and the ending date and time of the event, use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text
Open the calendar popup, and the time picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup.

6. You can classify your event using the Categories and tags section.

7. To assign a location of the event, click Location.
In the input fields that appear, enter the address of the event.

8. To provide contact information for the event, click Contact information.
In the input fields that appear, enter contact details.


 The automatically generated URL of the event.

To allow or forbid users to leave comments about the event, select or deselect the Allow comments checkbox.

 Configure multiple URLs for the event

a. To configure an event to have more than one URL, select Allow multiple URLs for this item... checkbox.

40

b. In the input box, enter the additional URLs that you want this event to have.

c. If you want all the URLs that you have entered to point to the default URL of the event, select All additional URLs
If you uncheck the checkbox, each URL will display the event without redirecting.

10. If you have added any custom fields for events, the Custom fields section, displaying all created fields, appears.

IMPORTANT: Some of the above fields may not be displayed when you create an event, because they have been hidden.


11. When you are finished creating the event, you must set its status, using the buttons on top and at the bottom of the event.
For more information, see Setting the status of a new page or content item.

NOTE: While creating you event, you can use the Preview button to see a preview of the event and its properties.

| Creating and editing events | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING EVENTS
EDITING, APPROVING, AND PUBLISHING THE CONTENT OF AN EVENT
1. Go to the Events page and open the event for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the event you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective event.

The Edit an event page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating an event  Step 2 to Step 10.


 If you have opened for editing an event in status Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected, perform procedure Managing a page or

 If you have opened for approving an event in status Awaiting approval, perform procedure Managing a page or content

 If you have opened for publishing an event in status Awaiting publishing, perform procedure Managing a page or content
item that is Awaiting publishing.

 If you have opened for editing an event in status Published or Scheduled, perform procedures Managing a page or
If you are editing a published event, the system saves a draft of that news, but the published version is still visible on the

UNPUBLISHING AND SCHEDULING A PUBLISHED EVENT
After an event item has been published, you can change the status of the event.

DELETING AN EVENT
You can delete an event in the following ways:

 On the Events page, select one or more events and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On the Events page, click the Actions link of the respective event.



SEARCHING AND FILTERING EVENTS
SEARCHING FOR EVENTS

41

To search for a particular event, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the event you are searching for.

3. Click Search.

FILTERING EVENTS
To display events, created only by your user, in the right side of the Events page, click My events link under Filter events.

You can also filter events by categories, tags, or status.

To filter events according to the date they were modified, click by Date modified…

 When you click a time interval, the system displays all the events updated during this time interval. The last updated are the
first in the list.

 To display events modified during some custom period of time, click Custom range… link.
Click Filter.



CREATING AND EDITING FORMS
You manage forms on the Forms page.

To open the Forms page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Forms.
The Forms page appears, displaying a list with all created forms together with actions you can perform on them.
Use this page to create, design, and edit forms and manage responses to forms.

Section contents


Create a form

Design a form

Edit a form

Search and filter forms

Configure form widgets

Manage responses to a forms

PERMISSIONS FOR FORMS
You can set permission for all forms and you can set individual permissions for each form.

To change the permissions for all forms, on Forms page, click Permissions for forms link in the right side of the page.
The Permissions for forms page appears.

DISPLAYING FORMS ON YOUR WEBSITE
To display the forms you have created on your website, you must use the Form widget and configure it.

42

For more information, see Configuring the Form widget.


CREATING A FORM
1. On Forms page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any forms, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more forms, the system displays a list all created forms and the following button in the
function bar of Forms page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating a form, you must first choose the language in which you
want to create the form. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


2. Click Create a form.
The Create a form page appears.

3. In the Title input field, enter the name of the form.

4. You can change the automatically generated name for developers by clicking Change and entering the new name in the input
field that appears.
This is the name of the form that is used by developers to refer to the form in the code.


The form is created and the system opens the form in content editing mode.
In content editing mode you design the layout of the form and add content using widgets.
For more information, see Designing a form.

 Create and return to Forms
An empty form is created and the system returns you to Forms page.

 Back to Forms
You return to Forms page without creating and saving the form.

| Creating and editing forms | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

DESIGNING A FORM
You design forms in content editing mode using the Layout builder and forms widgets.

1. To open a form in content editing mode, on Forms page, perform one of the following:

 Click the form you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective form.
From the dropdown list click Content.

The form opens in content editing mode.

2. To design the layout of the form, click Layout button in the upper-right corner of the page.
The Layout builder appears, displaying a list of layout elements on the right.

You edit the layout of forms the same ways you edit the layout of pages.
For more information, see Modifying the layout.

3. To add content to the form, click Content button in the upper-right corner of the page.
A list of form widgets appears on the right.

43

You add and use widgets in forms the same way you do in pages.
For more information, see Adding widgets on your page.
To configure the widgets to display what you require, see Configuring form widgets.

4. To change the setting of a form, click Settings button in the upper-right corner of the page.
You can change the following settings:

 Restrictions
In this radio button group you can control the responses to the form. Choose one of the following:

 One entry per IP
The form can be filled out and submitted only once from a particular IP. If the user tries to submit the form more
than once from the same IP address, the system displays an error massage.

 One entry per username
The form can be filled out and submitted only once by a particular user. If the same user tries to submit the form
more than once, the system displays an error massage.
Use this option only if there is user registration prior to submitting the form.

 No restrictions: Everyone can submit unlimited number of entries
The form can be submitted unlimited number of times from the same user and IP.

 Confirmation options
In this radio button group, you choose what happens after a user submits the form. Select one of the following:

 Show message for success
A textbox appears, where you define the success message that appears when a user submits the form.

 Redirect to a page…
After submitting the form the system redirects the user to another page of the website.
In the input field that appears, enter the URL name of the page from your website, which you want to open when the
form is submitted. For example, About-us.

 Label placement
Choose where to display the label of the elements, such as textboxes, checkboxes, and multiple choices.

 Top aligned
 Left aligned
 Right aligned
 CSS Class
You can choose a class name for each form if later you want to set a CSS style for this particular form.


EDITING A FORM
There are two ways to edit a form. You can edit the properties of a form, such as title, categories and tags and you can edit the
content of a form by adding layout elements and form widgets.

EDITING THE PROPERTIES OF A FORM
You can edit the properties of a form in the following way:

1. On Forms page, click the Actions link of the respective form and in the dropdown list, click Properties.
The EditForm page appears.

2. In Title input field you can change the title of the form.
The title of the form is used in the backend only and is not displayed on the website.


EDIT THE CONTENT OF A FORM
You can edit the content of a form, such as layout elements and widgets.

To do this, on Forms page, click the form or click the Actions link of the respective page and click Content.
The form opens in content editing mode.

44

For more information, see Designing a form and Configuring form widgets.

PUBLISHING AND DELETING A FORM
 Publishing and unpublishing a form.
After you have chosen whether to publish or save as draft a form when editing its content, you can change the status of the
form.

 Delete a form
You can delete a form in the following ways:

 On Forms page, select one or more forms and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Forms page, click the Actions link of the respective form.



SEARCHING AND FILTERING FORMS
SEARCHING FOR FORMS
To search for a particular form, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the form you are searching for.

3. Click Search.

FILTERING FORMS
To display forms, created only by your user, in the right side of the Forms page, click My Forms link under Filter forms.

You can also filter forms by status.


CONFIGURING FORM WIDGETS
You populate forms with content using form widgets. Form widgets are added on the form the same way regular widgets are
added on a page. For more information, see Adding widgets on your page.

When you open a form to edit its content, the following list of form widgets appear on the right of the page, when you click the
Content button:

Section contents

You can use the following widgets to design your form:

45

Textbox
Use this widget to give the user the opportunity to enter free text no longer than a line, such as street address, e-mail, etc.

Multiple choice
Use this widget to ask the user a question and give the user the opportunity to select only one of several predefined answers.

Checkboxes
Use this widget to ask the user a question and give the user the opportunity to select one or more of the predefined answers.

Paragraph box
Use this widget to give the user the opportunity to enter free text longer than one line, such as customer feedback.

Dropdown list
Use this widget to ask the user a question and give the user the opportunity to select only one of many predefined answers.

Section header
Use this widget to display form or section headings.

Instructional text
Use this widget to display instructions and explanatory text for the entire form or for a particular part of the form.

Submit button
Use this widget to display the button that the user uses to submit the form.

After you have dragged and dropped a widget in the form, click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget to configure
it. Note that the Submit button widget is automatically added by the system when you drop the first widget in the form.


TEXTBOX
Use this widget to give the user the opportunity to enter free text no longer than a line, such as street address, e-mail, etc.

After you have dragged and dropped the Textbox form widget in your form, click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the
widget.
The Textbox window appears, displaying the following tabs:

 Label and texts
On this tab, perform the following:

1. In Label input field enter the label of the textbox.
For example, Address or E-mail.
The label is displayed above, to the right, or to the left of the textbox, depending on what settings you have made for the
form. For more information, see Designing a form  Step 4.

2. In Instructional text, enter instructions or explanatory text for the textbox, if needed. The text is displayed bellow the
textbox.

3. In Predefined value, enter a predefined value for the textbox that is displayed in the box by default and the user can
change it if required.

4. Select the Make required checkbox if you want to make the textbox mandatory.
A textbox appears, where you enter the text that is displayed if the user does not fill out the textbox.

5. If you click Advanced: Name for developers, you can change the automatically generated name that is used to refer to the
widget in the code. To change it, click Change and enter the new name.

 Limitations

1. In Range input fields, enter the minimum and maximum number of characters that a user can enter in the textbox.
If you do not want to impose limits to the textbox, leave the Max input field empty and the Min input field 0.

2. Enter an error message that is displayed if the user enters less than or more than the selected limits.

 Appearance

1. In Textbox size dropdown, select the size of the textbox.
The textbox is always one line. The size of the textbox refers to its length.

46

2. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the textbox if later you want to set a CSS style for this particular
textbox.

When you are finished, click Save.

For more information about advanced configuration options, see Advanced configuration of widgets.

| Configuring form widgets | Creating and editing forms | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

MULTIPLE CHOICE
Use this widget to ask the user a question and give the user the opportunity to select only one of several predefined answers. A
multiple choice is a radio button group and the label of the group is the question that you want to ask.

After you have dragged and dropped the Multiple choice form widget in your form, click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of
the widget.
The Multiple choice window appears, displaying the following tabs:

 Label and texts

1. In Label (Question) input field enter the label of the radio button group.
The label of a multiple choice is a question, which possible answers are given in predefined radio buttons.
For example, Which is your favorite color? or Color preferences.

The label is displayed above, to the right, or to the left of the radio button group, depending on what settings you have
made for the form. For more information, see Designing a form  Step 4.

2. In Choices input fields, enter the possible answers to the question you have defined.
By default there are three input fields. In each input field, enter an answer (choice). If you need more or less choices, add
and remove input fields by clicking and buttons of the respective field.
You must have at least two choices.

3. If you select Add "Other" as a last choice checkbox, the system adds another undefined choice to the multiple choices and
displays an input field where you enter the label for that choice. For example, you can enter Other or Enter another,
etc.
When the user selects that last choice, an input field is displayed, where the user enters another answer different from
the predefined multiple choices.

4. In Default selected choice, select one of the following:

 The first one
The first choice you have listed is selected by default.

 None
No choice is selected by default.

The user can change the choice selected by default.


 Appearance

1. Choose in how many columns you want to display the choices you have defined.
You can choose between the following:

 One column
 Two columns
 Three columns
 Inline (side by side)
No columns are used; the radio buttons are displayed in a line.

2. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the multiple choice if later you want to set a CSS style for this
particular widget.


47



CHECKBOXES
Use this widget to ask the user a question and give the user the opportunity to select one or more of the predefined answers. The
Checkboxes widget is a checkbox group and the label of the group is the question that you want to ask.
After you have dragged and dropped the Checkboxes form widget in your form, click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of
the widget.
The Checkboxes window appears, displaying the following tabs:

 Label and texts

1. In Label (Question) input field enter the label of the checkbox group.
The label is a question, which possible answers are given in predefined checkboxes. The user can select more than one of
the checkboxes.
For example, Which of the foods do you consume daily? or Daily consumption of foods.
The label is displayed above, to the right, or to the left of the checkbox group, depending on what settings you have
made for the form. For more information, see Designing a form  Step 4.


3. If you want the choices you have defined to be sorted alphabetically, select the Sort choices alphabetically checkbox.

4. Select the This is a required field checkbox if you want to make the checkbox group mandatory.
The user must select at least one checkbox.


 Appearance

1. Choose in how many columns you want to display the choices you have defined.
You can choose between:

 One column
 Two columns
 Three columns
 Inline (side by side)
No columns are used; the radio buttons are displayed in a line.

2. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the checkbox group if later you want to set a CSS style for this
particular widget.




PARAGRAPH BOX
Use this widget to give the user the opportunity to enter free text longer than one line, such as customer feedback.

After you have dragged and dropped the Paragraph box form widget in your form, click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of
the widget.
The Paragraph text box window appears, displaying the following tabs:

 Label and texts

48

1. In Label input field enter the label of the paragraph box.
For example, Feedback or Comments.
The label is displayed above, to the right, or to the left of the paragraph box, depending on what settings you have made
for the form. For more information, see Designing a form  Step 4.

2. In Instructional text, enter instructions or explanatory text for the paragraph box, if needed. The text is displayed bellow
the paragraph box.

3. In Predefined value, enter a predefined value of the paragraph box that is displayed in the box by default and the user
can change it if required. For example, enter Type your feedback here…

4. Select the Make required checkbox if you want to make the paragraph box mandatory.
A textbox appears, where you enter the text that is displayed if the user does not fill out the paragraph box.


 Limitations

1. In Range input fields, enter the minimum and maximum number of characters that a user can enter in the paragraph box.
If you do not want to impose limits to the paragraph box, leave the Max input field empty and the Min input field 0.

2. Enter an error message that is displayed if the user enters less than or more than the selected limits.

 Appearance

1. In Paragraph Text box size dropdown, select the size of the box.

2. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the paragraph box if later you want to set a CSS style for this
particular box.




DROPDOWN LIST
Use this widget to ask the user a question and give the user the opportunity to select only one of many predefined answers. Use
this widget if the list of answers is long. A dropdown list is a dropdown box with a predefined list of entries and the label of the box
is the question that you want to ask.

After you have dragged and dropped the Dropdown list form widget in your form, click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of
the widget.
The Dropdown list window appears, displaying the following tabs:

 Label and texts

1. In Label (Question) input field enter the label of the dropdown box.
The label of a dropdown box is a question, which possible answers are given in a predefined dropdown list of entries.
For example, Which country are you from? or Country.
The label is displayed above, to the right, or to the left of the dropdown box, depending on what settings you have made
for the form. For more information, see Designing a form  Step 4.


NOTE: Each input field has a radio button at the end. Use the radio button to select the choice which is displayed by
default in the dropdown box. The user can then open the dropdown box and select another choice.

3. If you want the choices you have defined to be sorted alphabetically, select the Sort choices alphabetically checkbox.

4. If you click Advanced: Name for developers, you can see the name that is used to refer to the widget in the code.
To change the automatically generated name, click Change button and enter the new name.

49

 Appearance

1. In Textbox size dropdown, select the size of the dropdown box.
The box is always one line. The size of the box refers to its length. You choose the length of the dropdown box in
accordance with the length of the choices you have entered.

2. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the dropdown list if later you want to set a CSS style for this
particular widget.




SECTION HEADER
Use this widget to display form or section headings.

1. After you have dragged and dropped the Section header form widget in your form, click the Edit button in the upper-right
corner of the widget.
The Section header window appears, where you can perform the following:

 On Label and texts tab, enter the text of the heading.

 On Appearance tab, perform the following:

a. In Title font size dropdown box, choose the font size of the heading.

b. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the section header if later you want to set a CSS style for
this particular widget.

c. In Wrapping HTML tag input field, enter the HTML tag that will wrap the text. By default it is Heading 2 (H2). You
can enter any king of tag.




INSTRUCTIONAL TEXT
Use this widget to display instructions and explanatory text for the entire form or for a particular part of the form.

1. After you have dragged and dropped the Instructional text form widget in your form, click the Edit button in the upper-right
corner of the widget.
The Instructional text window appears, where you can enter text using the text editor.
For more information about the text editor, see Sitefinity Content Writer’s Guide  Using the text editor.




SUBMIT BUTTON
Use this widget to display the button that the user uses to submit the form.
You must have a Submit button widget in your form. The widget is automatically added by the system when you drop the first
widget in the form.

1. Click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Submit button window appears.

2. In Label input field, enter the label of the button.
By default the button is labeled Submit.

3. In Button size dropdown box, choose the size of the button.

50

4. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the button if later you want to set a CSS style for this particular
widget.




MANAGING RESPONSES TO A FORM
When you create and publish a form on the website, the users can fill it out and submit their answers. The responses you get to a
form are visible in the backend and you can see them via the Forms page.

1. To manage the responses to a form, on Forms page, click <number> responses link of the respective form.
The Responses page appears:

The page displays all submitted responses in a grid. The columns of the grid are the labels of the parts of your form, such as
labels of textboxes, questions with multiple choice answers, etc. Each response is a line in the grid, containing the number of
the response, the date when it was submitted, and the answers to all parts of the form.

 You can export all the data in a Comma-separated values (CSV) file by clicking Export as CSV button.

 You can create responses to the form using the Create a Response button.
In this case the artificially created response is numbered null in the list of all responses.

 You can see a preview of the form with the responses to each question, if you select the line in the grid.
The filled out form together with the exact time and date and the IP address appears on the right side of the page.

 You can delete one or more submitted responses by selecting the responses in the grid and clicking Delete button in the
function bar of the page.

 You can search for responses using the Search button in the function bar of the page.

2. To go back to Forms page, click Back to forms link above the function bar of the page.


UPLOADING AND EDITING IMAGES
You manage images on the Images page.

To open the Images page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Images.
The Images page appears, displaying a list of all uploaded images together with actions you can perform on them.
Use this page to upload, edit, and manage images.

Section contents


Upload images

Edit images

51

Display, sort, filter, and find images

Manage image albums

Display and order the images in an image album

PERMISSIONS FOR IMAGES AND IMAGE ALBUMS
You can set permission for all images and image albums and you can set individual permissions for each image or album.

To change the permissions for all images, on Images page, click Permissions link in the right side of the page.
The Permissions for all images page appears.
Libraries.
and permissions  Managing permissions Changing global and section permissions  Step 2 to Step 4.
For more information about setting individual permissions for images and image albums, see Sitefinity Installation and
item.

CUSTOM FIELDS FOR IMAGES
You can add a custom field to all images. A custom field is a field that you create. For each image there are default fields, such as

You then display a custom field on your website by adding it to a template for displaying images.

DISPLAYING IMAGES ON YOUR WEBSITE
To display the images you have uploaded on your website, you must use the Image widget or the Image gallery widget and
configure them to display images.
For more information, see Configuring the Image widget or Configuring the Image gallery widget.

You can then choose the way images are displayed by changing the template which the Image or Image gallery widget uses.

LINKING OR EMBEDDING AN IMAGE
On Images page click Embed this image link of the respective image.

 To link an image, copy the content of the Link input field.

 To embed an image in HTML, copy the content of the Embed field and paste it in HTML code.
For example you can embed an image in the text, using the text editor in HTML mode.


UPLOADING IMAGES
3. On Images page perform one of the following:

 If you have not uploaded any images, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first image you upload is in the default language.

52

 If you have already uploaded one or more images, the system displays all uploaded images and the following button in
the function bar of Images page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before uploading an image, you must first choose the language in which
you want to create the image. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


4. Click Upload images.
The Upload images page appears.

5. Click Select Images.

6. Browse your computer to find the image you want to upload and click Open.
You can select more than one image.
The file name of the image and its size appear in Upload images page.

7. To upload more images, click Add more and repeat Step 4.

8. In Where to store the uploaded Images? dropdown box, select the album where you want to store the image(s).
If you have not created any albums, you can only choose Default Album, which exists by default.
If you want to create more albums, you must go back to Images page and create an album.
For more information about creating albums, see Managing image albums.

9. You can classify your image using the Categories and tags section.

Uploading status bars appear on the page and after the system has uploaded the images, a massage appears informing you
about the result of the upload.


 View all images
Returns you to Images page.

 Upload more images
The system opens Upload images page, where you can upload new images.

NOTE: If you are in multilingual mode, on Images page, the system displays all available languages next to the image. You cannot
have different images in different languages, but you can have different titles for each language. To do this, click the Add link of
the respective icon.

NOTE: On Images page you can also download an already uploaded image, by clicking the Actions link of the image and then
Download.

| Uploading and editing images | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING IMAGES
EDITING PROPERTIES AND ADDING DETAILS TO AN IMAGE
1. To edit and add details to an already uploaded image, on Images page perform one of the following:

 Click the image you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective image and then click Edit Properties.

The Edit Image page appears.

2. Change the title of the image, by entering the new title in Title input field.

3. View the image in its original size as it would appear in a browser by clicking View in original size button below the preview of
the image.

4. Change the album which the image belongs to, by clicking Change album button and selecting the new album from the
dropdown box that appears.

53

5. Add alternative text to the image, under Alternative text, click Click to add alternative text and enter the text in the input field
that appears.
The text that you enter in Alternative text is used for accessibility reasons and by search engines.

6. Change the categories and the tags which the image is assigned to, by clicking Categories and tags.

7. To add details to the image, click Details.
The following input fields appear:

 Author
Enter an author of the image.

 Description
The description you enter in this input field appears as a tooltip for the image in browsers that support ToolTips feature.
When the image is opened, the description appears under the image.

8. By clicking Advanced, you can change the following:

 The automatically generated URL of the image.

 Configure multiple URLs for the image

a. To configure an image to have more than one URL, select Allow multiple URLs for this item... checkbox.

b. In the input box, enter the additional URLs that you want this image to have.

c. If you want all the URLs that you have entered to point to the default URL of the image, select All additional URLs
If you uncheck the checkbox, each URL will display the image without redirecting.

9. If you have added any custom fields for images, the Custom fields section, displaying all created fields, appears.

IMPORTANT: Some of the above fields may not be displayed when you edit the properties of an image, because they have
been hidden.


10. In the right side of the page, you can see the dimensions of the image and customize them.
To do this click Customize embedded image link and select the new size of the image.


 If you have opened for editing an image in status Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected, perform procedure Managing a page or

 If you have opened for approving an image in status Awaiting approval, perform procedure Managing a page or content

 If you have opened for publishing an image in status Awaiting publishing, perform procedure Managing a page or content

 If you have opened for editing an image in status Published or Scheduled, perform procedures Managing a page or
If you are editing a published image, the system saves a draft of that image, but the published version is still visible on

EDIT MANY IMAGES AT THE SAME TIME
You can edit the properties of many images at the same time. To do this, perform the following:

1. On Images page, select the images you want to edit and click More actions  Bulk edit titles, categories, tags.
The Bulk edit page appears displaying all the selected images.

2. You can apply the following to all selected images:

 Common album
Click Change album and select the album from the dropdown box that appears.
All images are moved to that album.


54


 Common tags

3. For each of the selected images, you can change the following:

 Title
 Alternative text
The text that you enter in Alternative text is used for accessibility reasons and by search engines.

 Description
The description you enter in the input field appears as a tooltip for the image in browsers that support ToolTips feature.

The system returns you to Images page.

PUBLISHING, MOVING, AND DELETING AN IMAGE
 Unpublishing and scheduling a published image.
After an image has been published, you can change the status of the image.

 To move one or more images to another album, on Images page, select the images and in the function bar click More actions
 Move to another album.
A window appears where you select the album where you want to move the images and click Move.

 To delete images, perform one of the following:

 On Images page, select one or more images you want to delete and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Images page, click the Actions link of the image you want to delete and then click Delete.



DISPLAYING, SORTING, FILTERING, AND FINDING IMAGES
The Images page displays all uploaded images by all users and from all albums.

CHANGING THE DISPLAY MODE
To change the view of the images and the corresponding information, in the function bar of Images page, click one of the
following:

 Click with the quick info text Thumbnails view to view images and information in boxes.

 Click with the quick info text List view to view images and the information in a grid.

DISPLAY IMAGES BY ALBUMS
To displaying images only from a specific album, click the album thumbnail in the right side of Images page.

NOTE: If you use button to view images, for each image, the system displays a link to the album in the grid. If you click the
link to the album, the system displays all images from this album.
For more information, see Managing image albums.

FILTER IMAGES
To display images, uploaded only by your user, in the right side of the Images page click My images link under Filter images.

You can also filter images by categories, tags, or status, using Other filter options in the right side of the Images page.

To filter images according to the date they were modified, click by Date …
The Display images modified in… pane appears.

 When you click a time interval, the system displays all the images modified during this time interval. The last modified are the
first in the list. You can change the sorting.

55

 To display images modified during some custom period of time, click Custom range… link.
Click Filter.


SORT IMAGES
You can sort images using the Sort images dropdown box in the function bar of Images page.

Sorts images in ascending order according to the time of upload.

Sorts images in ascending order according to time of modification.




The system sorts the images according to the custom sorting.

4. To edit a custom sorting that you have created, select Edit custom sorting… from the Sort images dropdown box.

SEARCHING FOR IMAGES
To search for a particular image, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the image you are searching for.

3. Click Search.
To return to the list of all images, click Close search button in the function bar.


MANAGING IMAGE ALBUMS
DISPLAYING ALL IMAGE ALBUMS
4. To display and manage all created albums, go to Images page.

5. In the right side of the page, under Images by Album, click Manage albums link.
Albums page appears where you can view and manage all albums.

CREATING AN IMAGE ALBUM
6. On Albums page or on Images page, in the function bar, click Create an album button.
The Create an album page appears.

NOTE: If you have not uploaded any images yet, on Images page, the Create an album link appears in the center of the
screen, under the Upload an image link.

7. Enter the name of the album.

8. To add a description of the album, click Click to add a description.


9. If you want to restrict the size in pixels of the images uploaded in this album, click Default image size.

56

Select the Resize images so their width won’t be larger than … radio button and select the desired maximum width of the
images.

10. You can define the maximum size of the album in MB and of each image in the album in KB by clicking Advanced.
The Max library size and the Max image size input fields appear where you enter the limit of the size in MB and KB
respectively.

11. You can change the URL of the album by clicking Advanced.
The automatically generated URL of the album appears.


 Create this album
The system creates the album and returns you to Images page Albums page, depending on where you have started
creating the album.

 Create and add another album
The system saves the album and displays a new Create an album page.

The system does not save the album you were working on and returns you to Images page Albums page, depending on
where you have started creating the album.

EDITING IMAGE ALBUMS
1. On Albums page click the Actions link of the album you want to edit.

The Edit an album page appears.


The system returns you to Albums page.

DELETING IMAGE ALBUMS
To delete an album, perform one of the following:

 On Albums page, select one or more albums you want to delete and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Albums page, click the Actions link of the album you want to delete and then click Delete.

 On Edit an album page, click More actions  Delete.



DISPLAYING AND ORDERING THE IMAGES IN AN IMAGE ALBUM

DISPLAYING AND EDITING THE IMAGES OF A SINGLE ALBUM
1. You can display all images in an album in one of the following ways:

 On Albums page, click the album which images you want to display.
All images in the album appear.

 On Images page, click the album thumbnail in the right side of page.
The system displays all the images from the selected album together with the Album actions link.

2. To edit the images in the album, perform procedure Editing images.

3. To go back to all images, click All images in the right side of the page or from the main menu in the upper part of the screen,
click Content  Images.

ORDERING IMAGES IN AN ALBUM
1. You order the images in an album in one of the following ways:

 On Albums page, click the album which images you want to reorder.
All images in the album appear.
Click Reorder images button in the function bar of the page.

57

 On Images page, click the album thumbnail in the right side of page.
The system displays all the images from the selected album together with the Album actions link.
Click Album actions and then click Reorder images.

The Reorder images in <album name> page appears.

2. You reorder images by dragging and dropping the image thumbnails in the desired order.


NOTE: You can also reorder images using the sorting function.


CREATING AND EDITING LISTS
You manage lists and their lists items on the Lists page.

You can use lists for various purposes. For example, you can create a list for your FAQ section, where each question is one list item
and the content of the list item is the answer to the question.

To open the Lists page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Lists.
The Lists page appears, displaying all created lists with the number of list items in each list together with actions you can perform
on them.

When you open a list you can view all items in this list.
To open the page with the list items, perform one of the following:

 On Lists page, click the list which items you want to view.

 On Lists page, click Edit list link of the respective list.

A page, displaying all items in the selected list, appears.
To navigate back to Lists page, click All lists link in the upper-left part of the page.

Section contents


Create a list

Edit lists

Search and filter lists

Create a list item

Edit list items

Order, search, and filter list items

PERMISSIONS FOR LISTS AND LIST ITEMS
You can set permission for all lists and list items and you can set individual permissions for each list or each item of a list.

To change the permissions for all lists, on Lists page, click Permissions link in the right side of the page.


CUSTOM FIELDS FOR LISTS
You can add a custom field to lists. A custom field is a field that you create. For each list there are default fields, such as
description, title, etc. If you need to add different than the already existing fields, you must create a custom field.

You then display a custom field for a list on your website by adding it to a template for displaying lists.

58

DISPLAYING LISTS ON YOUR WEBSITE
To display lists on your website, you must use the List items widget and you must configure it.
For more information, see Configuring the List items widget.

You can then choose the way lists are displayed by changing the template which the List items widget uses.


CREATING A LIST
1. On Lists page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any lists, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more lists, the system displays all created lists and the following button in the function
bar of Lists page:

2. Click Create a list.
The Create a list page appears.

3. In Title, enter the title for the list.

4. If you have added any custom fields for the lists, the Custom fields section, displaying all created fields, appears.

IMPORTANT: Some of the above fields may not be displayed when you create a list, because they have been hidden.


5. Click Create this list.
The system creates the list and takes you to create items in this list.

 If you want to create a list item now, click Create a list item.
For more information about how to create list items, see Creating a list item.

 If you want to go back to Lists page, without creating a list item, click All lists link at the upper-left part of the page.

| Creating and editing lists | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING LISTS
CHANGING THE TITLE OF A LIST
1. On Lists page click the Actions link of the respective list.

2. From the dropdown list click Edit.
The Edit list page appears.

3. Enter the new title.


DELETING LISTS
You can delete a list in the following ways:

 On Lists page, select one or more lists and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Lists page, click the Actions link of the respective list.

 On Edit list page, click More actions  Delete.

59



SEARCHING AND FILTERING LISTS
SEARCHING FOR LISTS
To search for a particular list, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the list you are searching for.

3. Click Search.

FILTERING LISTS
To display lists, created only by your user, in the right side of the Lists page, click My lists link under Filter lists.


CREATING A LIST ITEM
1. On Lists page perform one of the following:

 Click Add new list item link under the name of the list.

 Click the list.
The list items page appears, displaying one of the following:

 If you have not created any list items, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first lists item you create is in the default language.

 If you have already created one or more list items, the system displays all created list items and the following button
in the function bar of the page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating a list item, you must first choose the language in
which you want to create the item. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


2. Click Create a list item or Create new list item respectively.
The Create a list item page appears.

3. In the Title input field, enter the title of the list.

4. In the text editor enter the content of the item itself.

5. When you are finished creating the list item, you must set its status, using the buttons on top and at the bottom of the item.
For more information, see Setting the status of a new page or content item.

NOTE: While creating you list item, you can use the Preview button to see a preview of the list item and its properties.


60

EDITING LIST ITEMS
EDITING, APPROVING, AND PUBLISHING THE CONTENT OF A LIST ITEM
1. Go to the list items page and open a list item for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the list item you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective list item.
From the dropdown list, click Edit.

The Edit list page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a list item  Step 3 and Step 4.


 If you have opened for editing a list item in status Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected, perform procedure Managing a page

 If you have opened for approving a list item in status Awaiting approval, perform procedure Managing a page or content

 If you have opened for publishing a list item in status Awaiting publishing, perform procedure Managing a page or content

 If you have opened for editing a list item in status Published or Scheduled, perform procedures Managing a page or
If you are editing a published list item, the system saves a draft of that list item, but the published version is still visible
on the webpage. To see which version is the currently published one, see Revision History.

UNPUBLISHING AND SCHEDULING A PUBLISHED LIST ITEM
After a list item has been published, you can change the status of the list item.

DELETING LIST ITEMS
You can delete items in the following ways:

 On list items page, select one or more list items and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On list items page, click the Actions link of the respective list item.



ORDERING, SEARCHING, AND FILTERING LIST ITEMS

ORDERING LIST ITEMS
To order list items in a list, click Order button in the function bar. You can choose between the following ordering options:

 Manually
Use drag and drop to order the list.

 Alphabetically ascending or descending.
 Last modified on top or on bottom.

SEARCHING FOR LIST ITEMS
To search for a particular list item, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the list item you are searching for.

3. Click Search.

61


FILTERING LIST ITEMS
To display list items, created only by your user, in the right side of the page, click My list items link under Filter.


CREATING AND EDITING NEWS
You manage news on the News page.

To open the News page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  News.
The News page appears, displaying a list with all created news together with actions you can perform on them.
Use this page to create, edit, and manage news.

Section contents


Create news

Edit news

Search and filter news

COMMENTS FOR NEWS
On News page, you can view all the comments for news by clicking Comments for news link on the right side of the page.
All comments that have been submitted for all the news appear.


PERMISSIONS FOR NEWS
You can set permission for all news and you can set individual permissions for each news.

To change the permissions for all news, on News page, click Permissions link in the right side of the page.

CUSTOM FIELDS FOR NEWS
You can add a custom field to all news items. A custom field is a field that you create. For each news item there are default fields,
such as author, title, etc. If you need to add different than the already existing fields, you must create a custom field.

You then display a custom field on your website by adding it to a template for displaying news items.

DISPLAYING NEWS ON YOUR WEBSITE
To display the news you have created on your website, you must use the News widget and configure it.
For more information, see Configuring the News widget.

You can then choose the way news items are displayed by changing the template which the News widget uses.


CREATING A NEWS ITEM
1. On News page perform one of the following:

62

 If you have not created any news, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first news item you create is in the default language.

 If you have already created one or more news, the system displays a list all created news and the following button in the
function bar of News page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating a news item, you must first choose the language in which
you want to create the news item. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


2. Click Create a news item.
The Create a news item page appears.

3. In the Title input field, enter the name of the news.

4. In the text editor enter the news itself.

5. In Summary input field, you can enter a summery for the news.

6. You can classify your news using the Categories and tags section.

7. To provide additional information about the author and the source of the news, click Additional info.
In the input fields that appear, enter the author and/or the source.


 The automatically generated URL of the news.

To allow or forbid users to leave comments about the news, select or deselect the Allow comments checkbox.

 Configure multiple URLs for the news item

a. To configure a news item to have more than one URL, select Allow multiple URLs for this item... checkbox.

b. In the input box, enter the additional URLs that you want this news items to have.

c. If you want all the URLs that you have entered to point to the default URL of the news, select All additional URLs
If you uncheck the checkbox, each URL will display the news item without redirecting.

9. If you have added any custom fields for news items, the Custom fields section, displaying all created fields, appears.

IMPORTANT: Some of the above fields may not be displayed when you create a news item, because they have been hidden.


10. When you are finished creating the news item, you must set its status, using the buttons on top and at the bottom of the
news item. For more information, see Setting the status of a new page or content item.

NOTE: While creating your news, you can use the Preview button to see a preview of the news and its properties.

| Creating and editing news | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING NEWS

EDITING, APPROVING, AND PUBLISHING THE CONTENT OF A NEWS ITEM
1. Go to the News page and open a news item for editing in one of the following ways:

63

 Click the news item you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective news.

The Edit a news page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a news item  Step 3 to Step 9.


 If you have opened for editing a news item in status Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected, perform procedure Managing a page

 If you have opened for approving a news item in status Awaiting approval, perform procedure Managing a page or
content item that is Awaiting approval.

 If you have opened for publishing a news item in status Awaiting publishing, perform procedure Managing a page or

 If you have opened for editing a news item in status Published or Scheduled, perform procedures Managing a page or
If you are editing a published news item, the system saves a draft of that news, but the published version is still visible on

UNPUBLISHING AND SCHEDULING A PUBLISHED NEWS ITEM
After a news item has been published, you can change the status of the news.

DELETING A NEWS ITEM
You can delete news in the following ways:

 On News page, select one or more news and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On News page, click the Actions link of the respective news.



SEARCHING AND FILTERING NEWS
SEARCHING FOR NEWS
To search for a particular news item, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the news you are searching for.

3. Click Search.

FILTERING NEWS
To display news, created only by your user, in the right side of the News page, click My news link under Filter news.

You can also filter news by categories, tags, or status.

To filter news according to the date they were modified, click by Date modified…

 When you click a time interval, the system displays all the news updated during this time interval. The last updated are the
first in the list.

 To display news modified during some custom period of time, click Custom range… link.

64

Click Filter.



CREATING AND EDITING NEWSLETTERS
You use newsletters module to create newsletters, manage lists of subscribers to newsletters, and to create and test newsletter
campaigns.

You manage newsletters on the Newsletters page.

To open the Newsletters page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Newsletters.
The Newsletters page appears, displaying a summary of subscribers to newsletters.
Use this page to create, edit, and manage newsletters, mailing lists, subscribers, and newsletter campaigns.

Section contents


Creating a mailing list
Before you send a newsletter, you must have created a mailing list. The mailing list is a list of subscribers that will receive the
newsletter.

Managing subscribers, editing and deleting mailing list
You can import databases with subscribers to a mailing list or you can enter subscribers manually.

Creating a message template
If you do not want to create a new newsletter every time you create a newsletter campaign, you can create a template and
use it many times.

Editing message templates
Every time you need to update your newsletter, you can edit its template.

Creating a campaign
When you have created a mailing list with subscribers, you can send a newsletter to these subscribers. You do this by creating
a campaign.

Sending and scheduling a campaign
Use this procedure to send a newsletter to the subscribers or to schedule to send it.

Editing campaigns
Use this procedure to edit already existing campaigns.

Creating an A/B campaign
An A/B campaign is a comparison between two campaigns with the same mailing lists. You use it to test the effectiveness of
the campaigns.

Starting, stopping, and editing A/B campaigns
Use this procedure to start and stop campaign testing and edit comparison campaigns.

Creating a subscriber
Use this procedure to manually create subscribers and attach them to mailing lists.

Editing subscribers
Use this procedure to edit the names or the emails of subscribers.

SUBSCRIBING TO NEWSLETTERS ON THE WEBSITE
To allow users to subscribe and unsubscribe to your newsletter, you must use the Subscribe form widget and the Unsubscribe form
widget and configure them.
For more information, see Configuring the Subscribe form widget and Configuring the Unsubscribe form widget.

You can then choose the way subscription and unsubscription forms are displayed by changing the template which the Subscribe
form widget and the Unsubscribe form widget use.

65



CREATING A MAILING LIST
1. In the right pane of Newsletters page click Mailing lists.
The Mailing lists page appears.

 If you have not created any mailing lists, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more mailing lists, the system displays a list of all created mailing lists and the
following button in the function bar of Mailing lists page:

2. Click Create a mailing list or Create new mailing list respectively.
The Create a mailing list page appears.

3. In Mailing list title, enter the title of the mailing list.
For example, My Company Newsletter.

4. In Default from name, enter what will be displayed as sender of the newsletter.

5. In Default reply-to email, enter the email, to which the subscribers of the newsletter will send replays.
You must have configured the Newsletters SMTP settings.

6. In Default subject, enter what will be displayed as subject of the email with the newsletter.

7. Remind people why they are receiving this newsletter.
For example, enter You are receiving this email because you opted in at our website.

8. In Connect this list section, you can connect existing subscribers to your new mailing list.
Perform the following:

a. Click Add connection button.
A new window appears.

b. In Connection source dropdown box, select from where you want to connect your mailing list.
You can dynamically import subscribers from the following:

 Sitefinity users
These are all users registered in the website, both in the backend and in the frontend.

In Connect this list to dropdown box, select the membership provider for the users which you want to add as
subscribers.
The dropdown box contains all created membership providers.

 Sitefinity forms module
These are the responses submitted to a form on your website. For more information, see Creating and editing forms.

In Connect this list to dropdown box, select the form, which responses you want to use as subscribers.

c. If you want to change the automatically generated connection title, enter a new title in Connection title input field.
For example, enter Corporate clients.

d. You can filter the list of users by entering a dynamic list filter expression.
Use dynamic LINQ syntax with the merge tags. For example, if merge tag is {|CustomerForm.State|}, you can enter
a filter like: State <> 'California'.

e. Map the fields required for a subscriber to the respective form fields or the respective user fields.
The fields required for a subscriber are First name, Last name, and Email. For each of these fields there is a dropdown

66

box, containing all available fields form a form or a user record. For each of the required fields, select a corresponding
form field or user field.

f. When finished, click Save changes.

Every time a Sitefinity user is created or a user completes the form, he or she is also added as a subscriber to the mailing list.

9. If you want to send a welcome email to new newsletter subscribers, select I'd like to welcome new subscribers with an email
message checkbox.
 Enter a subject for the welcome message and enter an email from which appears with the welcome message.

 Choose a template that will be sent as welcome message.
You must create a template first. For more information, see Creating a message template.

10. If you want to follow up users that unsubscribe from the newsletter, select I'd like to follow up with people that unsubscribe
checkbox.

 Enter a subject for the follow up message and enter the email that will appear as sender email.

 Choose a template that will be sent as follow up message.
You must create a template first. For more information, see Creating a message template.

11. When finished creating the mailing list, click one of the following buttons:

 Create this mailing list
The mailing list is created and the system returns you to Mailing lists page.

 Create and add another
The mailing list is created the form is cleared and you can create a new mailing list. To do this, go to Step 3.

 Cancel
The mailing list is not created and the system returns you to Mailing lists page.

| Creating and editing newsletters | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

MANAGING SUBSCRIBERS, EDITING AND DELETING MAILING LIST

IMPORTING SUBSCRIBERS TO A MAILING LIST
1. To import subscribers to a mailing list, open the Mailing lists page.

2. Click the Actions link of the mailing list where you want to import subscribers.

3. From the dropdown list, click Import subscribers link.
The Import subscribers page appears.

4. Select the format of the data with subscribers.
You can import subscribers as one of the following:

 Comma Separated Values (CSV) file.
Select Comma separated list radio button.

 Tab Separated Values (TSV) file.
Select Tab separated list radio button.

5. Map the fields required for a subscriber to the respective columns in the file.
The fields required for a subscriber are First name, Last name, and Email. For each of these fields there is a dropdown box,
containing the available columns. For each of the required fields, select a corresponding column.

6. If you want the imported subscribers to replace the already existing if their email addresses match, select Imported
subscribers with emails that already exist in the mailing list should replace existing subscribers checkbox.
7. To select the file, click Select and browse your computer to find the file.
The file must have a .csv or a .tsv extension.

8. Click Import.

ADDING A SUBSCRIBER TO A MAILING LIST
1. To add a new subscriber to a mailing list, open the Mailing lists page.

2. Click the Actions link of the mailing list which you want to add a subscriber to.

67

3. From the dropdown list, click Add subscriber link.
The Create a subscriber page appears.

4. Perform procedure Creating a subscriber  Step 3 to Step 5.

NOTE: In Step 4 the mailing list, where the subscriber is added is already selected.

EDITING A MAILING LIST
1. Go to the Mailing lists page and open the mailing list for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the mailing list you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective list.
From the dropdown list, click Properties.

The Edit mailing lists page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a mailing list  Step 3 to Step 10.


DELETING A MAILING LIST
You can delete a mailing list in the following ways:

 On the Mailing lists page, select one or more lists and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On the Mailing lists page, click the Actions link of the respective list.



CREATING A MESSAGE TEMPLATE
1. In the right pane of Newsletters page click Message templates.
The Message templates page appears.

 If you have not created any message templates, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more message templates, the system displays a list of all created templates and the
following button in the function bar of Message templates page:

2. Click Create a message template or Create a template respectively.
The Create a template page appears.

3. Enter a name for the template.

4. Select the type of template, which you want to create.
Choose one of the following:

 Rich text (HTML)
You can create text with rich formatting, such as bold, italic, and bullets. You can insert images.
Some email clients may not interpret it correctly.

a. Create the newsletter using the text editor.

b. Use the dropdown box above the text editor to insert different placeholders in your newsletter, such as the name and
the email of the subscriber or different properties of the mailing list.
For example, your newsletter can start like this Dear <First name of subscriber>, following is our
<Default subject of mailing list>. The message can appear like this: Dear John, following is our Monthly
newsletter.

68

c. After you select a placeholder, click Insert.

 Plain text
You cannot use any text formatting.
Accessible to all email clients.

a. Create the newsletter by entering the text in the textbox.

b. Use the dropdown box above the text box to insert different placeholders in your newsletter, such as the name and
the email of the subscriber or different properties of the mailing list.
For example, your newsletter can start like this Dear <First name of subscriber>, following is our
<Default subject of mailing list>. The message can appear like this: Dear John, following is our Monthly
newsletter.
c. After you select a placeholder, click Insert.

 Like a web page
You can use multicolumn layouts an rich design. Your newsletter will look like a webpage.
Some email clients may not interpret it correctly.

a. Choose the layout of the page that will be sent as newsletter.
For more information, see Creating a new page  Template.

b. Click Compose the template in page editor button.
The page that will be sent as newsletter opens in content editing mode. You can customize the layout of the page
and add content by adding widgets. For more information, see Modifying the layout, Displaying content using
widgets, Applying a template to a page.

c. When you are finished creating the page, click Done.

5. When you are finished creating the message template, click Create this template.


EDITING MESSAGE TEMPLATES
EDITING A MESSAGE TEMPLATE
1. Go to the Message templates page and open the template for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the message template you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective template.

The Edit template page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a message template  Step 3 and Step 4.


DELETING A MESSAGE TEMPLATE
You can delete a message template in the following ways:

 On the Message templates page, select one or more messages and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On the Message templates page, click the Actions link of the respective list.



CREATING A CAMPAIGN
1. On Newsletters page perform one of the following:

 In the function bar of the page, click Create a campaign button

 In the right pane of Newsletters page, click Campaigns.
The Campaigns page appears.

69

a. Perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any campaigns, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more campaigns, the system displays a list of all created campaigns and the
following button in the function bar of Campaigns page:

b. Click Create a campaign.

The Create a campaign page appears.

2. From the list of mailing lists that appears, select one mailing list that will receive the newsletter of the campaign.
If you have not created any mailing lists, click Create a mailing list button and perform procedure Creating a mailing list 
Step 3 to Step 11.
3. Click Next.

4. Enter a name for the campaign.
For example, enter MyProduct Newsletter.

5. The Message subject, From name, and Reply to email field contain the values that you entered when creating the mailing list.
You can change the values if needed.

6. If you select Enable Google Analytics tracking for this campaign checkbox, the data about the website traffic generated by this
campaign is collected by Google Analytics and you can see it in Campaign report of the Analytics module. For more
information, see Traffic sources detailed reports  Campaigns.

7. Click Next.

8. Select how the newsletter will look like.
Choose one of the following radio buttons:

 Create a campaign from template
In the dropdown box, select one of the already created newsletter templates.
For more information, see Creating a message template.

 ... or create a campaign from scratch
Select this if you want to create a new newsletter.
Choose the type of newsletter you want to create. Perform procedure Creating a message template  Step 4.

9. If you newsletter is not Plain text, after you create it, you must also create a plain text version.

 Automatically generate plain text version
 Manually enter plain text version
10. Click Next.

11. When you finished, choose what to do with the campaign by clicking one of the following:

Send this campaign Campaign is saved and sent to the subscribers of the mailing list.
A confirmation message appears on Campaigns page.

Save as draft Saves the campaign without sending it. You can manage the saved campaign on Campaigns
page.

Send test You can see how your newsletter looks like in an email by sending it to a test email.

a. In the text box, enter one or more email addresses to which you want to send a test
message.
Separate the email by comma.

b. Click Send test message button.

70

Schedule delivery Select this, if you want to schedule date and time when you want to send the newsletter to
the subscribers of the mailing list.

a. Click Deliver campaign on input field.

b. Use the calendar and the time slider to select the desired time and date.

c. Click Schedule.

Discard this campaign The campaign is not saved.

The system returns you on Campaigns page.


SENDING AND SCHEDULING A CAMPAIGN
SENDING A CAMPAIGN
To send a campaign to all subscribers, perform the following:

1. On Campaigns page, click the Actions link of the campaign, which you want to send.

2. From the dropdown list, click Send.
The campaign newsletter is send to all of the subscribers of the mailing list of the campaign.


SENDING A TEST NEWSLETTER
To see how your newsletter looks like, you can send a test campaign.
To do this, perform the following:

1. On Campaigns page, click the Actions link of the campaign, which you want to test.

2. From the dropdown list, click Send test.

3. In the text bow that appears, enter the test email addresses to which you want to send the test newsletter.
Separate the addresses with commas.

4. Click Send test message button.


SCHEDULING TO SEND A CAMPAIGN
To schedule date and time when you want to send the newsletter to the subscribers of the mailing list, perform the following:

1. On Campaigns page, click the Actions link of the campaign, which you want to schedule.

2. From the dropdown list, click Schedule delivery.

3. Click Deliver campaign on input field.

4. Use the calendar and the time slider to select the desired time and date.

5. Click Schedule.

VIEWING THE REPORT FROM THE CAMPAIGN
The data gathered for each campaign is accumulated and you can view a detailed report.

To see the report of a campaign, click the Reports link of the respective campaign.

The report contains general and detailed information about the campaign, such as number of bounced messages and list of links
that are clicked.


EDITING CAMPAIGNS

EDITING A CAMPAIGN
1. Go to the Campaigns page and open the template for editing in one of the following ways:

71

 Click the campaign you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective campaign.
From the dropdown list, click Edit campaign.

The Edit campaign page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a campaign Step 2 to Step 12.


DELETING A CAMPAIGN
You can delete a message template in the following ways:

 On the Campaigns page, select one or more messages and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On the Campaign page, click the Actions link of the respective list.



CREATING AN A/B CAMPAIGN
Use this procedure to compare the effectiveness of two campaigns.

PREREQUISITES: You must have created at least two campaigns using the same mailing list.

Perform the following:

1. In the right pane of Newsletters page click A/B campaigns.

 If you have not created any A/B campaigns, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more A/B campaign, the system displays a list of all created campaigns and the
following button in the function bar of the page:

2. Click Create A/B campaign.
The Create new A/B campaign page appears.

3. In Select campaign A dropdown box, select the first campaign you want to compare.

4. In Select campaign B dropdown box, select the second campaign you want to compare.

NOTE: Both campaigns must have the same mailing lists.

5. Select the criterion for the winning campaign, by choosing one of the following radio buttons:

 More opened emails
The newsletter that is opened by more test subscribers will be send to all subscribers of the mailing list after the
comparison campaign is over.

 More link clicks
The campaign where the links in the newsletter are clicked more often by the test subscribers will be send to all
subscribers of the mailing list after the comparison campaign is over.

 I will manually decide the winning campaign
When the test period ends, the data is accumulated, but the winning newsletter is not send. You can see the data when
you click Report link of the respective A/B campaign. On the report page, you can manually decide which campaign will be
send to all subscribers of the mailing list.

6. Use the slider to determine the percentage of subscribers of the mailing list that will be used as test subscribers and will
receive one of the test campaigns.

72

7. In Decide the winning campaign on field, choose the end time of the test period.
This is when the data, such as clicks and bounces, will be summed and the winning campaign will be decided.

 To select the date, click Open the calendar popup.

 To select the end time, click Open the time view popup.

The A/B campaign is saved. You must manually start testing.


STARTING, STOPPING, AND EDITING A/B CAMPAIGNS
STARTING AND STOPPING CAMPAIGN TESTING
To start or stop the testing of campaigns, perform one of the following:

1. On the page with A/B campaigns, click the Actions link of the created A/B campaign.

2. From the dropdown box, click one of the following:

 Start testing
The configured A and B campaigns are sent to the test users.

 End testing
The testing of the configured A and B campaigns is stopped, regardless of the predefined end date, and the gathered data
is accumulated.
You can see the data collected for both campaigns by clicking Report link of the respective A/B campaign.

VIEWING THE REPORT FROM CAMPAIGN TESTING
When testing is finished, the data is accumulated and you can view a detailed report.

To see the report of an A/B campaign, click the Reports link of the respective campaign.

The report contains general and detailed information about the campaigns you are comparing. You can also use the buttons at the
bottom to manually decide which the winning campaign is.

EDITING AN A/B CAMPAIGN
1. Open an A/B campaign for editing by clicking the Actions link of the respective campaign.

2. From the dropdown list, click Edit campaign.
The Edit A/B campaign page appears.

3. Perform procedure Creating an A/B campaign  Step 3 to Step 8.

DELETING A CAMPAIGN
You can delete an A/B campaign in the following ways:

 Select one or more A/B campaigns and click Delete button in the function bar.




CREATING A SUBSCRIBER
1. In the right pane of Newsletters page click Subscribers.
The Subscribers page appears.

 If you have no subscribers, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

73

 If you have already one or more subscribers, the system displays a list of all subscribers and the following button in the
function bar of Subscribers page:

2. Click Create a subscriber.
The Create a subscriber page appears.

3. Enter the email, the first and the last name of the subscriber.

4. If you want to add the subscriber to one or more mailing lists, click Select mailing lists button.
Select one or more mailing lists and click Done selecting.

5. When finished, perform one of the following:

 Create this subscriber
The subscriber is created and the system takes you to Subscribers page.

The subscriber is created, the form is cleared, and you can create a new subscriber.

 Cancel
The subscriber is not created and the system takes you back to Subscribers page.


EDITING SUBSCRIBERS
EDITING A SUBSCRIBER
1. Go to the Subscribers page and open the template for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the subscriber you want to edit.


The Edit subscriber page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a subscriber  Step 3 and Step 4.


VIEWING THE REPORT FROM SUBSCRIBER’S ACTIVITY
The data about the activity of each subscriber is accumulated and you can view a detailed report.

To see the report of a subscriber’s activity, click the Reports link of the respective campaign.

The report contains general and detailed information about the activity of a user, such as number of clicks and a list of clicked
links.

DELETING A SUBSCRIBER
You can delete a subscriber in the following ways:

 On the Subscribers page, select one or more messages and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On the Subscribers page, click the Actions link of the respective list.



74

UPLOADING AND EDITING VIDEOS
You manage videos on the Videos page.

To open the Videos page, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Content  Videos.
The Videos page appears, displaying a list of all uploaded videos together with actions you can perform on them.
Use this page to upload, edit, and manage videos.

Section contents


Upload videos

Edit videos

Display, sort, filter, and find videos

Manage video libraries

Display and order the videos in a video library

PERMISSIONS FOR VIDEOS AND VIDEO LIBRARIES
You can set permission for all videos and video libraries and you can set individual permissions for each video or library.

To change the permissions for all videos, on Videos page, click Permissions link in the right side of the page.
The Permissions for videos page appears.
Libraries.
and permissions  Managing permissions Changing global and section permissions  Step 2 to Step 4.
For more information about setting individual permissions for videos and video libraries, see Sitefinity Installation and
item.

CUSTOM FIELDS FOR VIDEOS
You can add a custom field to all videos. A custom field is a field that you create. For each video there are default fields, such as

You then display a custom field on your website by adding it to a template for displaying videos.

DISPLAYING VIDEOS ON YOUR WEBSITE
To display the videos you have uploaded on your website, you must use the Video widget or the Video gallery widget and
configure them to display videos.
For more information, see Configuring the Video widget or Configuring the Video gallery widget.


You can then choose the way videos are displayed by changing the template which the Video and Video gallery widget uses.

LINKING OR EMBEDDING A VIDEO
On Videos page click Embed this video link of the respective video.

 To link a video, copy the content of the Link input field.

 To embed a video in HTML, copy the content of the Embed field and paste it in HTML code.
For example you can embed a video in the text, using the text editor in HTML mode.


75

UPLOADING VIDEOS
1. On Videos page perform one of the following:

 If you have not uploaded any videos, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, the first video you upload is in the default language.

 If you have already uploaded one or more videos, the system displays all uploaded videos and the following button in the
function bar of Videos page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before uploading a video, you must first choose the language in which
you want to create the video. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


2. Click Upload videos.
The Upload videos page appears.

3. Click Select videos.

4. Browse your computer to find the video you want to upload and click Open.
You can select more than one video.
The file name of the video and its size appear in Upload Videos page.

5. To upload more than videos, click Add more and repeat Step 4.

6. In Where to store the uploaded videos? dropdown box, select the library where you want to store the video(s).
If you have not created any libraries, you can only choose Default Library, which exists by default.
If you want to create more libraries, you must go to Videos page and create a library.
For more information about creating libraries, see Managing video libraries.

7. You can classify your video(s) using the Categories and tags section.

Uploading status bars appear on the page and after the system has uploaded the video, a massage appears informing you
about the result of the upload.


 View all videos
Returns you to Videos page.

 Upload more videos
The system opens Upload videos page, where you can upload new videos.

NOTE: If you are in multilingual mode, on Videos page, the system displays all available languages next to the video. You cannot
have different videos in different languages, but you can have different titles for each language. To do this, click the Add link of the
respective icon.

NOTE: On Videos page you can also download an already uploaded video, by clicking the Actions link of the video and then
Download.

| Uploading and editing videos | Using the content modules | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING VIDEOS
EDITING PROPERTIES AND ADDING DETAILS TO A VIDEO

76

1. To edit and add details to an already uploaded video, on Videos page perform one of the following:

 Click the video you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective video and then click Edit Properties.

The Edit Video page appears.

2. Change the title of the video, by entering the new title in Title input field.

3. Play the videos using the integrated player below the Title field.

NOTE: You can also play the video in your own player or save the video on your computer.
To do this, click Open the file button.
In the dialog box that appears, select if you want to Save or Open the video.

4. Change the video with another video by clicking Replace the file.
The Select video link appears.

a. Click Select video.

b. Browse your computer to find the video you want to upload and click Open.
Uploading status bar appears on the page and after the system uploads the video, you can play it in the integrated player.

5. Change the video thumbnail by clicking Change button in Thumbnail section.
The Generate thumbnails window appears where the system plays the videos.

a. Whenever you want to capture an image for the video thumbnail, click Get currently displayed frame button.
You can capture as many thumbnails as you want and you can replay the video, if needed.

b. Select the image that you want to display in the thumbnail and click Done.
The system returns you to Edit Video page and changes the thumbnail.

6. Change the library which the video belongs to, by clicking Change library button and selecting the new library from the
dropdown box that appears.

7. Change the categories and the tags which the video is assigned to, by clicking Categories and tags.

8. To add details to the video, click Details.
The following input fields appear:

 Author
Enter an author of the video.

 Description
The description you enter in the input field appears as a tooltip for the video in browsers that support ToolTips feature.
When the video is opened, the description appears under the video.

9. By clicking Advanced, you can change the following:

 The automatically generated URL of the video.

 Configure multiple URLs for the video.

a. To configure a video to have more than one URL, select Allow multiple URLs for this item... checkbox.

b. In the input box, enter the additional URLs that you want this video to have.

c. If you want all the URLs that you have entered to point to the default URL of the video, select All additional URLs
If you uncheck the checkbox, each URL will display the video without redirecting.

10. If you have added any custom fields for videos, the Custom fields section, displaying all created fields, appears.

IMPORTANT: Some of the above fields may not be displayed when you edit the properties of a video, because they have
been hidden.



77

 If you have opened for editing a video in status Draft, Unpublished, or Rejected, perform procedure Managing a page or

 If you have opened for approving a video in status Awaiting approval, perform procedure Managing a page or content

 If you have opened for publishing a video in status Awaiting publishing, perform procedure Managing a page or content

 If you have opened for editing a video in status Published or Scheduled, perform procedures Managing a page or content
item that is Published or Managing a page or content item that is Scheduled respectively.
If you are editing a published video, the system saves a draft of that video, but the published version is still visible on the

EDIT MANY VIDEOS AT THE SAME TIME
You can edit the properties of many videos at the same time. To do this, perform the following:

1. On Videos page, select the videos you want to edit and click More actions  Bulk edit titles, categories, tags.
The Bulk edit page appears displaying all the selected videos.

2. You can apply the following to all selected videos:

 Common library
Click Change library and select a library from the dropdown box that appears.
All videos are moved to that library.


 Common tags

3. For each of the selected videos, you can change the following:

 Title
 Description
The description you enter in the input field appears as a tooltip for the video in browsers that support ToolTips feature.

4. When finished, click Upload.
The system returns you to Videos page.

PUBLISHING, MOVING, AND DELETING A VIDEO
 Unpublishing and scheduling a published video.
After a video has been published, you can change the status of the video.

 To move one or more videos to another library, on Videos page, select the videos and in the function bar, click More actions 
Move to other library.
A window appears where you select the library where you want to move the videos and click Move.

 To delete videos, perform one of the following:

 On Videos page, select one or more videos you want to delete and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Videos page, click the Actions link of the video you want to delete and then click Delete.



DISPLAYING, SORTING, FILTERING, AND FINDING VIDEOS
The Videos page displays all uploaded videos by all users and from all libraries.

CHANGING THE DISPLAY MODE
To change the view of the videos and the corresponding information, in the function bar of Videos page, click one of the following:

78

 Click with the quick info text Thumbnails view to view videos and information in boxes.

 Click with the quick info text List view to view videos and the information in a grid.

DISPLAY VIDEOS BY LIBRARIES
To displaying videos only from a specific library, click the library thumbnail in the right side of Videos page.

NOTE: If you use with the quick info text List view button to view videos, for each video, the system displays a link to the
library in the grid. If you click the link to the library, the system displays all videos from this library.
For more information, see Managing video libraries.

FILTER VIDEOS
To display videos, uploaded only by your user, in the right side of Videos page, click My videos link under Filter videos.

You can also filter videos by categories, tags, and status using Other filter options in the right side of Videos page.

To filter videos according to the date they were modified, click by Date …
The Display Videos modified in… pane appears.

 When you click a time interval, the system displays all the videos modified during this time interval. The last modified are the
first in the list. You can change the sorting.

 To display videos modified during some custom period of time, click Custom range… link.
Click Filter.


SORT VIDEOS
You can sort videos using the Sort videos dropdown box in the function bar of the page.

Sorts videos in ascending order according to the time of upload.

Sorts videos in ascending order according to time of modification.




The system sorts the videos according to the custom sorting.

4. To edit a custom sorting that you have created, select Edit custom sorting… from the Sort videos dropdown box.

SEARCHING FOR VIDEOS
To search for a particular video, use the search option.


2. Enter the name or part of the name of the video you are searching for.

3. Click Search.
To return to the list of all videos, click Close search button in the function bar.

79


MANAGING VIDEO LIBRARIES
DISPLAYING ALL VIDEO LIBRARIES
1. To display and manage all created libraries, go to Videos page.

2. In the right side of the page, under Videos by Library, click Manage libraries link.
The Libraries page appears where you can view and manage all libraries.

CREATING A VIDEO LIBRARY
1. On Libraries page or on Videos page, click Create a library button in the function bar.
The Create a library page appears.

NOTE: If you have not uploaded any videos yet, on Videos page, the Create a library link appears in the center of the screen,
under the Upload a video link.

2. Enter a name for the library.

3. To add a description of the library, click Click to add a description.


4. You can define the maximum size of the library and of each video in the library by clicking Advanced.
The Max library size and the Max video size input fields appear where you enter the limit of the size in MB and KB respectively.

5. You can change the URL of the library by clicking Advanced.
The automatically generated URL of the library appears.


 Create this library
The system creates the library and returns you to Videos page or Libraries page, depending on where you have started
creating the library.

 Create and add another library
The system saves the library and displays a new Create a library page.

The system does not save the library you were working on and returns you to Videos page or Libraries page, depending
on where you have started creating the library.

EDITING VIDEO LIBRARIES
1. To edit the library properties, on Libraries page click the Actions link of the library you want to edit.

The Edit a library page appears.


The system returns you to Libraries page.

DELETING VIDEO LIBRARIES
To delete a library, perform one of the following:

 On Libraries page, select one or more libraries you want to delete and click Delete button in the function bar.

 On Libraries page, click the Actions link of the library you want to delete and then click Delete.

 On Edit a library page, click More actions  Delete.



DISPLAYING AND ORDERING THE VIDEOS IN A VIDEO LIBRARY
DISPLAYING AND EDITING THE VIDEOS OF A SINGLE LIBRARY

80

1. You can display all video in a library in one of the following ways:

 On Libraries page, click the library which videos you want to display.
All videos in the library appear.

 On Videos page, click the library thumbnail in the right side of page.
The system displays all the videos from the selected library together with the Library actions link.

2. To edit the videos in the library, perform procedure Editing videos.

3. To go back to all videos, click All images in the right side of the page or from the main menu in the upper part of the screen,
click Content  Videos.

ORDERING VIDEOS IN A LIBRARY
1. You order the videos in a library in one of the following ways:

 On Libraries page, click the library which videos you want to reorder.
All videos in the library appear.
Click Reorder videos button in the function bar of the page.

 On Videos page, click the library thumbnail in the right side of page.
The system displays all the videos from the selected library together with the Library actions link.
Click Library actions and then click Reorder videos.

The Reorder videos page appears.

2. You reorder videos by dragging and dropping the videos thumbnails in the desired order.


NOTE: You can also reorder videos using the sorting function.


CREATING AND EDITING CONTENT WHILE BROWSING THE WEBSITE
Use this procedure to create, edit, and upload content while you are browsing the website. You do not need to open the website in
the backend; you can use the inline editing function to edit your website directly while browsing it. Using the direct inline editing,
you can see how the items you are editing look in the context of the website.

To directly edit your website, perform the following:

1. Open the inline editing in one of the following ways:

 On Sitefinity Dashboard, click Edit content directly browsing the site link.

 Login to Sitefinity and open the website in a browser.

The system opens the website and displays the following button in the right of the page:

When the system displays this button, it means that you can edit content directly in the browser.

2. Click Tools button and from the dropdown menu, click Show editing tools.
Next to each item that you can edit, the system displays one of the following buttons:

Button: Displayed with widget: Available actions: Perform procedure:

Content block Edit the content in the with the text Configuring the Content block
editor. widget

Document link  Upload new documents or files Configuring the Document link
widget
 Replace the current document or file

Download list  Change currently displayed Configuring the Download list
documents or files widget

81

 Change the display settings

Image  Upload new image Configuring the Image widget

 Replace the current image

 Resize the image

Image gallery  Change currently displayed images Configuring the Image gallery
widget

Video  Upload new video Configuring the Video widget

 Replace the current video

Video gallery  Change currently displayed videos Configuring the Video gallery
widget

Blog posts  Edit the blog post Editing blog posts

 Delete the blog post

Events  Edit the event Editing events

 Delete the event

News  Edit the news item Editing news

 Delete the news item

Events Create a new event Creating an event

News Create a news item Creating a news item

NOTE: If there is an active workflow, the process of creating, editing, and uploading content follows the rules of the workflow.
For more information, see Defining and managing a workflow and Managing the status of content items and pages.

When you are in inline editing mode, the system indicates this by changing the color of Tools button as in the following
screenshot:

3. To close the inline editing mode, click Tools button and from the dropdown menu click Hide editing tools.

4. If you want to make changes that are not available in inline editing mode, you must open the page in Sitefinity backend by
clicking Tools  Edit this page in the Backend.

NOTE: To see which user is logged and can use the inline editing, click Tools. The system displays the user that is currently
logged in Sitefinity. You can use the Tools button to logout after you finish the changes.


VIEWING VERSION HISTORY OF A CONTENT ITEM
Use this function to view and compare different versions of a content item. Every time you edit a content item, a version of that
content item is saved by the system.

To view the history, perform one of the following:

 Click the Actions link of the respective item and click Revision History.

 To open the item for editing, in the right of the page click Revision History.

The Revision History page appears, containing a list of all versions of the item.
The following screenshot displays three versions of event MyEvent:

82

In case the item has been published, the system indicates which version of the item is published, by displaying next to this
version.

On Revision History page, you can do the following:

 You can view a previous version of the item by clicking the version.
A preview of the page opens. You can revert to a previous version of the page by clicking Revert to this version button.
The system makes the selected version of the item the current one.

 You can compare two versions of an item, by selecting them and clicking Compare.

 The system displays both the content and the properties of the two versions.

 You can delete versions of the item, by selecting them and clicking Delete.

 You can add note to each version, by clicking the Write note link of the respective version.
An input field where you enter and save the note appears.
The note is displayed in the Revision History page. You can edit and delete the note.


MANAGING COMMENTS FOR CONTENT ITEMS
When you publish a content item on your website, users can leave comments. You can then manage those comments, using the
Comments page. The Comments page contains all comments for a particular content type. For example, comments for news.
Users can leave comments for blog posts, events, and news.

DISPLAYING COMMENTS
1. To open the Comments page for a particular content type, open the page of that content type.
For example, open the News page or the Events page.

2. In the right side of the page, under Manage also, click Comments for <content type> link.
For example, on News page, click Comments for news link.
The Comments page for that content type appears. All comments for that content type are displayed in a table.

NOTE: If there are no comments displayed, check if you have enabled comments for content items. You can enable or disable
comments for each individual content item by clicking the Actions link of the respective item, then click Content. In More options
section, select or deselect Allow comments checkbox.

EDITING A COMMENT
1. To open a comment for editing, click the Edit link of the particular comment.
The Edit a comment page appears.

2. You can edit the text of the comment using the text editor.

3. You can edit the name, the e-mail, and the website of the user who posted the comment.

NOTE: You can block all comments from this e-mail by clicking Block this email.

4. You can see the date when the comment was posted and the IP address from which it was posted.

83

NOTE: You can block all comments from this IP address by clicking Block this IP.

5. In Status radio button group, you can change the status of a comment.
For more information, see the procedure bellow.

6. When finished editing, click Save changes.
The system returns you to Comments page.

CHANGING THE STATUS OF A COMMENT AND DELETING A COMMENT
A comment can be one of the following statuses:

 Published
The comment is publically visible on the website.

 Hidden
Use this option if you do not want a comment to be visible on the website, but you do not want to delete it.

 Spam
Use this option to mark a comment as spam and activate the spam filters.

CHANGING THE STATUS OF COMMENTS
You can change the status of a comment in one of the following ways:

 Select one or more comments and click the respective button in the function bar of the page.
You can choose Hide, Hide and mark as spam, or Publish.

 Open a comment for editing and use the Status radio button group to select the desired status.

 To hide a comment, click the Hide link of the respective comment.

 To mark a comment as spam, click the Actions link of the respective comment and click Mark as spam.

DELETING COMMENTS
You can delete a comment in one of the following ways:

 Select one or more comments and click Delete button in the function bar of the page.

 Click the Delete link of the respective comment.



ADDING CUSTOM FIELDS TO CONTENT ITEMS
Use this procedure to add a custom field to a content item, such as news, events, or images. A custom field is a field that you
create. For each content item there are default fields, such as author, title, etc. If you need to add different than the already
existing fields, you must create a custom field, for example, price. A custom field is associated with the content type. The field
appears in the backend when somebody is creating that content type. The custom field can then be filled out by the creator and
then displayed on the public part by adding it to the template, which is used to display that content type.

EXAMPLE: When creating an event you can enter its location, starting and ending time, and other predefined parameters. For
each event you can add a custom field, for example Dress code. Afterwards, each time an event is created, the creator can fill out
this Dress code field. You can make this field to be a multiple choice. You can also choose where or whether to display this field on
the website together with each event by modifying the template that is used to display events.

Section contents

Creating a new custom field
Use this procedure to create a custom field if the predefined default fields do not suit your needs.

Editing an existing data field
Use this procedure to edit a custom field or a predefined default field.

DISPLAYING INFORMATION ENTERED IN A CUSTOM FIELD

84

After you have created a custom field, everybody who is creating or editing the content items for which you have added a custom
field can enter information in that field. If for the content type you are creating there are any created custom fields, a Custom
fields section appears at the end of the page and the created fields appear in this section.
To display a custom field in the public side of your website, you must add the field to the widget template which you use to display
that content type. For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget templates
editor  Creating and editing widget templates.


CREATING A NEW CUSTOM FIELD
To add a custom field to a content item, perform the following:

1. Open the page of that content type.
For example, open the Images page or the Events page.

2. In the right side of the page, click Custom Fields for <content type> link.
The <Content type> data fields page appears. The system displays a list of all custom and default fields for that content type.

For example, on News page, click Custom fields for news link and the News data fields page appears.

NOTE: You can add and delete custom fields, but you cannot add or delete default fields.

3. To add a custom field, in Custom fields section, click Add a field… button.
A window opens.

4. In Type dropdown box, select what type of input will be entered in this custom field.
Different types of input require the use of different widgets for entering data.

 If you choose Number type of field, the Decimal places dropdown box appears.
Select the number of decimal places after the decimal point that can be entered in this field.

 If you choose Classification type of field, the Classification dropdown box appears.
Select the type of classification you want to create.
The dropdown box contains the predefined types of classifications – Categories and Tags, and any other custom
classifications you have created. For more information, see Creating custom classifications.

5. Enter a name for the field.
The name of the field is different from its label. The name of the field serves as reference for that field in the backend.

6. If you select This is a hidden field checkbox, the custom field is not visible on the website or in the backend, you can only use
it in the code.
You can later unhide the field, by clicking it in section Custom fields and changing the selection on Appearance tab.

7. In Interface widget for entering data dropdown box, you select the widget which the creator or editor of the news will use to
complete the field.

Each type of field you select in Type dropdown box has a default widget(s) for entering data. The following table contains the
list of all types of fields together with a description of what is displayed when creating and editing the content item, for which
the field is created:

Type of field Appearance of the custom field

Short text An input field with labels and instructions, which you add in Step 9.

Long text The text editor. For more information, see Using the text editor.

Multiple choice Radio buttons with labels, which you add in Step 9.

Yes / No A checkbox, which you select for Yes and deselect for No.

Currency An input field with labels and instructions, which you add in Step 9.

Date and Time An input field with labels and instructions, which you add in Step 9.

Number An input field with labels and instructions, which you add in Step 9.

85

Classification  If in Interface widget for entering data dropdown box, you have selected Textbox selector, the
system displays an input field where you type new classifications or a link where you select from
the existing classifications.
For more information, see Adding categories and tags to a content item  Adding tags.

 If in Interface widget for entering data dropdown box, you have selected Tree-like selector, the
system displays a tree structure of existing classifications, from which you can select.
For more information, see Adding categories and tags to a content item  Adding categories.

NOTE: You can also select a custom template for displaying the field….

8. Expand the Advanced section if you want to change the database and the SQL database type of the custom field, if you want
to specify the name of the column of the database table where the custom field is added, and if you want to make additional
advanced settings.

If the Allow empty values checkbox is selected, it means that the field is not required and can be left empty. If you deselect it,
the field becomes mandatory.

9. Click Continue.
A window appears where you must configure the appearance of the custom field, such as labels and instructions.


 If in Type input field, you have selected Short text, Long text, Yes / No, Currency, Date and Time, Number, or
Classification, perform the configuration procedure for Textbox  Label and texts and Limitations tabs.
 If in Type input field, you have selected Multiple choice, perform the configuration procedure for Checkboxes  Label and
texts tabs.
11. Click Appearance tab and select where you want to display the custom field you have created.

 If you do not want to display the custom field on all screens where you work with the content item, you can select the
checkboxes of only those screens where you want the field to be displayed.

 If in Step 6 you have made the field a hidden field, radio button Nowhere. This is a hidden field is selected on Appearance
tab when you open the field for editing. If you change the selection, the field is no longer hidden.

 If the field is not hidden, you can hide it by selecting Nowhere. This is a hidden field radio button.

12. On Appearance tab, in CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the custom field if later you want to set a CSS
style for this particular field.

13. Click Done.
The new field appears in Custom fields section.

If you want to delete a custom field, click .

To go back to the page with the content items, click Go back.

| Adding custom fields to content items | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING AN EXISTING DATA FIELD
To edit a custom or default field of a content item, perform the following:

1. Open the page of that content type.
For example, open the Images page or the Events page.

2. In the right side of the page, click Custom Fields for <content type> link.
The <Content type> data fields page appears. The system displays a list of all custom and default fields for that content type.

For example, on News page, click Custom fields for news link and the News data fields page appears.

NOTE: For custom fields, you can only edit how the field looks like and where it is displayed, you cannot change its type or
the widget it uses. For default fields, you can only edit where the field is displayed. You cannot delete a default field.

3. To edit a custom field, in Custom fields section, click the name of the field you want to edit.
The Settings window appears.

Perform procedure Creating a new custom field  Step 10 to Step 13.

86

4. To edit a default, in Default fields section, click the name of the field you want to edit.
The Edit a field window appears.

Perform procedure Creating a new custom field  Step 11 and Step 13.

5. To save your work, click Save changes.

| Adding custom fields to content items | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

USING THE TEXT EDITOR
Use the text editor to create content, which can then be published on the website.

 You can enter content directly in the editor and use the editor’s formatting functions.

 You can insert already written content from another source using editor’s different pasting functions.

 You can also insert various objects, such as tables, images, documents, symbols and more. You can create hyperlinks to
webpages, e-mails, and anchors in the text.

 You can use additional toolbar and shortcut key functions, such as spellchecking, printing, finding and replacing, undoing and
redoing, and more.

 You can enter and edit text as HTML code by clicking HTML at the bottom of the text editor.

For more information see Sitefinity Content Writer’s Guide  Using the text editor


CLASSIFYING YOUR CONTENT
Using classifications, you can organize content items, such as news, events, and comments.

In Sitefinity, there are two types of classifications:

 Simple list
Simple lists group content into a controlled set of categories. There is no relation between the classifications of the simple list.
They are equal members of a single structure.

 Hierarchical list
By using this kind of classification, you can group content in hierarchy on more than one level. Relationship between a top
level entry and a subentry in the hierarchy can mean group membership or refinement of the top classification by a particular
characteristic or feature.

EXAMPLE: Dogs can be one tag and Cats can be another. Both Dogs and Cats are simple lists, meaning that all items tagged
with Dogs are equal members of Dogs structure, there are no relationships between dogs. On the other hand, you can have a
category Animals, which has subcategories Dogs and Cats. This means that all cats are Cats and all dogs are Dogs, but also all
cats and dogs are Animals.

Section contents

87

In Sitefinity there are two types of predefined classifications:

Tags
The tags are representing a simple list.

Categories
The categories are presenting a hierarchical list.

To view, create, edit, delete, and manage classifications, click Content  All classifications.
The system displays a list of the predefined classifications – tags and categories, together with all created custom classifications.

You add tags and categories to content items either while creating them or after that in the following way:

Adding categories and tags to a content item
Use this procedure to add categories and tags to a content item either when creating it or when editing it.

Creating custom classifications
In addition to Tags and Classifications, you can create custom classification. You can create either simple lists or hierarchical
lists.


USING TAGS
You use tags to filter content items according to some criterion. By clicking on different tags from the list of tags displayed on the
webpage, the user can filter the content on the page.

EXAMPLE: If you have a list of news, some of which are news about the weather and you have tagged them with the tag
weather, and some news are about the traffic and you have tagged them with tag traffic, by adding the Tags widget to your page,
you give the users the opportunity to filter only traffic or only weather news by clicking the respective tag.

To display list of tags on your website, you must use the Tags widget and you must configure it.
For more information, see Configuring the Tags widget.

Section contents

On the Tags page you can perform the following:

Create a tag

Edit tags

| Classifying your content | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

CREATING A TAG
1. To create a tag, click Content  Tags.

2. On Tags page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any tags, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more tags, the system displays a list all created tags and the following button in the
function bar of Tags page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating a tag, you must first choose the language in which you
want to create the tag. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


3. Click Create a tag.
The Create a tag page appears.

88

4. Enter the name of the tag.

5. In Description input field, enter a description of the tag.

6. You can change the automatically generated URL of the tag by clicking Change button and entering the new URL in the input
field that appears.

7. By clicking Advanced, you can perform the following:

 Enter synonyms of the tag.
You can filter your content items by the tag name or by the tag synonyms.

 Change the automatically generated name used in the code by developers to refer to the tag, by clicking Change.

8. When you are finished click one of the following:

 Create
The tag is created and the system returns you to Tags page.

 Create and add another.
Use this button if you want to create more tags.

| Using tags | Classifying your content | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING TAGS

EDITING A SINGLE TAG
1. Go to the Tags page and open the tag for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the tag you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective tag.

The Edit a tag page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a tag  Step 4 to Step 7.


EDITING ALL TAGS AT ONCE
You can edit the URL name and the synonyms of all tags at the same time.

1. To do this, click Bulk edit (URLs and synonyms) button in the function bar of the page.
The Bulk edit URLs and Synonyms page appears, displaying a list of all tags together with their URLs and synonyms.
If you do not select any tags, all created tags appear in the page.

2. Edit URLs and synonyms, by entering in the input fields of the respective tags.

3. Click Save changes
The system returns you to Tags page.

DELETING TAGS
1. To delete a tag, on Tags page perform one of the following:

 Select the tag and click Delete button in the function bar.

 Click the Actions link of the tag you want to delete and click Delete.

2. In the dialog box that appears confirm the deletion.

BROWSING ITEMS THAT ARE TAGGED WITH A SPECIFIC TAG
Use this function to view all items that are tagged with a tag and to remove the tag from items.

 On Tags page, in column APPLIED TO, click <number> items link of the tag you want to explore.
A list of items belonging to the selected tag appears. The list is divided according to content type.
To view items of different content type, click the respective link above the list of the items. For example, Blog posts, News
items.
 To remove the selected tag from one or more items, select the items and click Remove Tag <tag name> from the selected
items button in the function bar of the page.

89

For example, Remove Tag Traffic from the selected item.

 To view and change the properties of the tag, click Tag <category name> properties button in the function bar of the page.
For example, Tag Traffic properties.
The Edit a tag page appears.
For more information, see procedure Editing a single tag above.

| Using tags | Classifying your content | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

USING CATEGORIES
You use categories to filter content. By clicking different categories from the treeview displayed on the webpage, you can filter the
content of the page. By using hierarchy of categories, you can filter content items according to more general or more specific
criteria.

EXAMPLE: You can have a list of events categorized according to their location. Some of the events are held in Europe, some in
Asia. Some of the European events are held in Italy, some in France. If you have added category Italy to the Italian events and
category France to the French and you have created those two categories as child categories of category Europe, then by adding a
Categories widget to your page, you give the users the opportunity to filter all European events by clicking category Europe, which
include both French events and Italian event, but also to go in depth and filter events with more specific locations, such as events
held in France, by clicking France category.

To display list of tags on your website, you must use the Categories widget and you must configure it.
For more information, see Configuring the Categories widget.

Section contents

On the Categories page you can perform the following:

Create a category

Structure the list of categories

Edit categories


CREATING A CATEGORY
1. To create a category, click Content  Categories.

2. On Categories page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any categories, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more categories, the system displays all created categories and the following button in
the function bar of Categories page:

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode, before creating a category, you must first choose the language in which
you want to create the news item. Select the language from Languages dropdown box in the right of the page.


3. Click Create a category or Create a Category respectively.
The Create a Category page appears.

4. Enter the name of the category.

5. Choose between the following radio buttons:

 No parent
The category you want to create is a top level category.

90

 Select a parent…
The category you want to create is under another category. For example, animals can be the parent category of
mammals, and mammals can be the parent category of cats.
A list of existing categories appears. Select the parent category of the new category and click Done.

6. To add a description for the category, click Click to add a description.
In the input field that appears, enter the description of the category.

7. In URL name, you can change the automatically generated URL of the tag by clicking Change button and entering the new
URL in the input field that appears.


 Enter synonyms of the category.
You can filter your content items by the name of the category or by its synonyms.

 Change the name used in the code by developers to refer to the category, by clicking Change.

9. When you are finished click one of the following:

 Create
The category is created and the system returns you to Categories page.

 Create and add another.
Use this button if you want to create more categories.

| Using Categories | Classifying your content | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

STRUCTURING THE LIST OF CATEGORIES
Use this procedure to group content in hierarchy on more than one level.

REORDERING CATEGORIES ON THE SAME HIERARCHICAL LEVEL
To move a category up or down in the list of categories, click the Actions link of the respective category and then click Up or Down.
The Create a category page appears.

For more information, see Creating a category.

MOVING CATEGORIES ON DIFFERENT HIERARCHICAL LEVELS
 To create a sub category of a category, click the Actions link of the respective category and click Create a child category.
The Create a category page appears. In section Parent category, the parent of the new category is already selected.
For more information, see Creating a category.

 To change the parent of a category, click the Actions link of the category which parent you want to change and then click
Change parent category.
A window appears, where you can choose between the following radio buttons and click Save changes:

 No parent
You choose this if you want the category to be a top level category.

 Select a parent
A list of existing categories appears. Select the new parent category of the category.


EDITING CATEGORIES
EDITING A CATEGORY
1. To edit an already existing category, perform one of the following:

 Click the category you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective category and then click Properties.

The Save a category page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a category  Step 4 to Step 8.

3. Click Save.
The system returns you to Categories page.

91

DELETING A CATEGORY
1. To delete a category, on Categories page perform one of the following:

 Select the category and click Delete button in the function bar of the page.

 Click Actions button of the category you want to delete and click Delete.

2. In the dialog box that appears confirm the deletion.

BROWSING ITEMS THAT BELONG TO A SPECIFIC CATEGORY
Use this function to view all items that belong to a category and to remove items from a category

 On Categories page, in column APPLIED TO, click <number> items link of the category you want to explore.
A list of items belonging to the selected category appears. The list is divided according to content type.
To view items of different content type, click the respective link above the list of item. For example, Blog posts, News items.

 To remove one or more items from the selected category, select the items and click Remove Category <category name> from
the selected items button in the function bar of the page.
For example, Remove Category Mammals from the selected items.

 To view and change the properties of the category, click Category <category name> properties button in the function bar of
the page.
For example, Category Mammals properties.
The Edit a category page appears.
For more information, see procedure Editing a category above.


ADDING CATEGORIES AND TAGS TO A CONTENT ITEM
You can add categories and tags to a content item either when creating it or when editing it. You do this by clicking Categories
and tags section on the page where you create, upload, or edit a content item.

ADDING CATEGORIES
1. In Category section, click Click to add categories link.
A treeview with all existing categories appears.

2. You assign your content item to one or more categories by selecting their checkboxes and clicking Done button.

3. If you have not still created any categories, or need another category for your content item, perform the following:

a. Click Create a category link.
The Create a category window appears.

b. Enter the name of the category and choose between the following radio buttons:

 No parent
The category you want to create is a top level category.

 Select a parent
The category you want to create is under another category. For example, animals can be the parent category of
mammals, and mammals can be the parent category of cats.
A list of existing categories appears. Select the parent category of the new category.

c. Click Create this category
The new category you have created automatically appears as a selected category for the content item.

4. To add more categories for the content item, click Change and perform Step 1 and Step 2.

5. To delete categories assigned to the content item, click with the quick info text Remove this category.

ADDING TAGS
In Tags section, perform one of the following:

 In the input field that appears, enter a new tag name and click Add.

 Click Select from existing link.
From the list of all existing tags that appears, click the tags with which you want to tag the content item.

92

To delete a tag assigned to the content item, click with the quick info text Remove this tag.


CREATING CUSTOM CLASSIFICATIONS
In addition to Tags and Classifications, you can create custom classification. You can create either simple lists or hierarchical lists.
For example, you can create a custom classification Price range that is simple list and Location classification, which is hierarchical
list of regions, where each region contains a list of countries. You can then add a custom classification as a custom field of a
content item and display that classification on your website. For example, you can create and add the Location classification to
news items. Every time a news item is created, its location can be selected.

Section contents:

Creating and editing a custom classification

Creating and editing single classification items


CREATING AND EDITING A CUSTOM CLASSIFICATION
CREATING A CUSTOM CLASSIFICATION
To create a custom classification, perform the following:

1. Open the Classifications page, by clicking Content  All classifications.

2. Click Create a classification.
The Create a classification page appears.

3. In Classification input field, enter the name of the classification, for example, Dress code.

4. In Single item name, enter the name of a single item in this classification, for example, Dress code type.

5. Choose the Type of the classification, by selecting Simple list or Hierarchical list. For more information about types of
classification, see Classifying your content.

6. To add a description of the classification, click Click to add a description.

7. To change the name that is used in code to refer to that classification, click Change button and add a new name.

8. When finished, click Create this classification.

The classification appears on Classification page and the system takes you to create your first item from this classification. For
more information, see procedure Creating single classification items below.

EDITING CUSTOM CLASSIFICATIONS
1. To edit the properties of a classification, go to Classifications page.

NOTE: You cannot edit or delete the predefined classifications Tags and Categories.

2. Click the Actions link of the respective classification and from the dropdown box, click Properties.
The Edit a Classification page appears.

3. Perform procedure Creating a custom classification above  Step 3 to Step 7.

NOTE: You cannot change the type of the classification.

4. When finished editing, click Save changes.

| Creating custom classifications | Classifying your content | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

CREATING AND EDITING SINGLE CLASSIFICATION ITEMS
CREATING SINGLE CLASSIFICATION ITEMS
1. To create a single item in a classification, open the classification by clicking it on Classifications page.
For example, if you have created a custom classification Dress code, on Classification page, click Dress code to create different
types of dress code.
The <Classification name> page appears.

93

2. Click Create a <name of single item>.
For example, click Create a Dress code type, to be able to create a dress code, such as Casual.

3. Enter the name of the classification item.
For example, enter Casual.

4. To add a description of the classification item, click Click to add a description.

5. To change the automatically generated URL, click Change button and enter the new URL.


 Enter synonyms of the classification item.

 Change the name used in the code by developers to refer to the classification item, by clicking Change.

7. When finished, click one of the following:

 Create
You create the item and go back to the page of the classification.

The item is created and a new Create page appears.

 Back to <Classification name>
You go back to the page of the classification without creating the item.

EDITING A SINGLE CLASSIFICATION ITEM
1. To edit a classification item, open the classification, which the item belongs to, by clicking it on Classification page.

2. In the list of classification items, click the item you want to edit.

3. Perform the procedure above  Step 3 to Step 6.


| Creating custom classifications | Classifying your content | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

TRANSLATING CONTENT ITEMS AND CLASSIFICATIONS
You can create a new language translation of a content item or classification. The system displays all language translation in which
a content item or a classification exists in the following way:

 On the respective content item page, for each item, the system displays:

NOTE: If you have created more than six language translation, on the respective content item page the system displays only
the first six language icons. To view all created languages, click More translations… link of the respective content item. To
display all languages for all content items on the page, click Show all translations link in the upper-right corner of the page.

 On the editing page of the content item, for example news, the system displays:

 Language translations of an item, whose language icons are dark blue and have the Edit link next to the language icon,
already exist.

 Language translations of pages, whose icons are light blue and have the Add link next to the language icon, have not been
created yet.

If you are not using multiple languages, the system does not display language icons next to content items and classifications.

NOTE: Before you create a content item in a different than the default language, you must have added this language in the
settings of Sitefinity.
For more information, see Managing languages.

94

CREATING A NEW ITEM IN A DIFFERENT LANGUAGE
To create a new item in a certain language, perform the following:

1. Go to the page of the content type.
For example, go to Events page.

2. From the Languages dropdown box on the right, select the language, in which you want to create the item.

3. Perform procedure for creating the respective content item.
For example, Creating an event.

TRANSLATING AN EXISTING CONTENT ITEM
1. You create a new language translation in one of the following ways:

 On the respective content item page, click the Add link under the respective language icon.

 Open the content item in editing mode click the Add link of the respective language.

2. Perform procedure for creating the respective content item.
For example, Creating a news item.

NOTE: If you click the Compare translations link, the system opens a different translation of the content item. The translation
serves only as reference. You can change the displayed translation, by selecting the respective language in the Translate from:
dropdown box.

NOTE: Images, videos, and documents do not differ in the different languages, but you can add different title for each image or
video in the different languages. For example, the same image can exist in English and Spanish with different titles.

NOTE: When a content item exists in different languages, each translation is displayed with its respective page translation.
For example, a news item in Spanish is displayed in the News widget in the Spanish version of the page, the English news item is
displayed in the English version of the page. If the French translation of the page contains the News widget, but there is no French
version of the news, the widget does not display anything.

To switch between different language translations of a page you must add and configure the Language selector widget to the
page.

EDITING A TRANSLATION OF A CONTENT ITEM

1. You edit a language translation of a content in one of the following ways:

 On the page of the respective content item, click the Edit link under the respective language icon.

 On the page of the respective content item, in Languages field on the right, select the desired language and click the
name of the content item, which you want to edit.

2. Perform the procedure for editing the respective content item.
For example, perform procedure Editing events.

DELETING A LANGUAGE TRANSLATION OF A CONTENT ITEM
On the page of the respective content item, you delete a language translation by selecting the respective language in Languages
dropdown box and performing one of the following:

 Select the content item(s), whose translation(s) you want to delete and click Delete button in the toolbar.

 Click the actions link of the respective content item and click Delete.

IMPORTANT: The system asks you if you want to delete only the current translation of the item or all translations of this item.


CREATING AND EDITING FEEDS
Use feeds and notifications to publish frequently updated information. You can publish an RSS feed for a blog, news, or events on
the website and the users can subscribe to this feed. This way they will receive updates of the blog, news, or events without
having to visit the website. You can also publish content you create in Sitefinity as tweets via a Twitter account.

95

INCLUDED CONTENT
You can publish as feed one of the following types of content:

 Sitefinity content
For example, you can publish a news or a blog post as RSS feed or as a tweet in Twitter.

 External RSS feed
For example, you can use an external RSS feed and publish it as news in Sitefinity.

 Mail content
For example, you can use the email messages of a particular mail account and publish them as an RSS feed on you website.

PUBLISHED CONTENT
You can publish the included content in one of the following types:

 Sitefinity content
 RSS feed
 Twitter feed
You manage feeds on Feeds & Notifications page.
To open the page in the main menu at the top, click Administration  Feeds & Notifications.

You display the RSS feed in your website using the Feed widget. For more information, see Configuring the Feed widget.

Section contents

On Feeds & Notifications page you can do the following:

Create a feed

Edit, delete, filter, and view feeds


CREATING A FEED
1. On Feeds & Notifications page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any feeds, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more feeds, the system displays a list all created feeds and the following button in the
function bar of Feeds & Notifications page:

.

2. Click Create a feed.
The Create a feed page appears.

3. Enter the following information for the new page:

Title In this input field, enter a title for the feed.

The title is publicly visible and will be the title for the whole feed in the RSS reader.

Description In this input field, enter description for the feed.

The description is not publically visible.

Active checkbox Select or deselect the Active checkbox to make the feed active or inactive.

When a feed is active, new items that are created, such as events or news, are published in the feed.
When you make a feed inactive, the newly published items do not become part of the feed.

96

Change Data Click this button if you want to change the way fields are recorded in the database or if you want to
structure…button create a new field that you will map to an existing field of the content you want to publish and to a
field form the content type in which you want to publish.

EXAMPLE: You want to create an RSS feed that is publishing events, which you create in Sitefinity.
You have added a custom field Dresscode to Events and you want to display this field in the feed. You
can create a new data field EventDressCode by clicking Change Data structure…  Add a data field.
Then, in Content to include section below, you include events as content and using the Mapping
Settings button, you match EventDressCode to Dresscode field. Then, in section Publish as…, you
must map the EventDressCode field to one of the RSS fields, for example, Description.


To change existing or create new data fields, perform the following procedure:

d. Click Change Data structure… button.
A window opens, displaying all existing data fields.

e. To modify an existing data field, select it and on the right of the window, change the respective
properties.

f. To create a new data field, click Add a data field and configure the properties of the new field.
Name is the name with which the field is recorded in the database.
g. To delete a field, select it and click Delete data field button.

h. Click Save changes.
The window closes and the system creates the field. You must map the field to other fields in the
following sections, using the Mapping Settings button.

Content to include In this section, you can choose the content that will serve as source content for the feed.
section By default the content that is selected to be included in the feed is Posts from all blogs.

 You can delete the automatically selected content or other selected content by clicking with
the quick info text Remove.

 You can change the settings of the selected content by clicking Change… button.

 You can add more content by clicking Add another content type… button.
The Select content source window appears. Select one of the following radio buttons:

SITEFINITY CONTENT
In this section, choose which Sitefinity items to include in the feed.
By default the new feed includes blog posts from all blogs.

a. In Content type dropdown box, select the type of content include in the feed.
If you have selected Blogs, in Which blog posts to display? radio button group, select one of the
following:

 From all blogs
All published posts are included in the feed.

 From selected blogs only…
Click Select a blog. From the list that appears, select the blog whose posts you want to
include in the feed and click Done selecting.

b. Select the page where the content is published, by clicking Select a page button.

c. To change the mapping of data fields, click Mapping Settings button.
In the window that appears, you have a list of the data fields of the feed you are creating. To
these fields, you can map existing fields of the content type you have selected.

If you have created a new data field in the previous section, using the Change Data structure…
button, you can map a field from the content type to that newly created field. The content type
fields, which can be mapped, can be both predefined and custom fields. For more information,
see Adding custom fields to content items.

When you are finished with the mapping of fields, click Accept changes.

97

d. Click Done.

NOTE: Only published content is included in the feed.

EXTERNAL RSS/ATOM FEED
You can use as source content an external RSS feed.

a. Enter the URL of the external RSS or Atom feed.

b. Choose how many items to include by selecting one of the following radio buttons:

 Include the newest <number> items
In the input field, enter how many of the external RSS or Atom items you want to display.

 Include all published items
The feed displays all items from the external RSS or Atom feed.

these fields, you can map existing fields of the RSS or Atom feed you have selected.

button, you can map a field from the RSS or Atom feed to that newly created field


d. Click Done.

MAIL CONTENT
a. Enter the name of the POP3 server.

b. Enter the port used by the server.

c. Select if you want Sitefinity to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to encrypt the connection.

d. Enter the user name of the account that you use to connect to the mail server.

e. Enter the password of the account that you use to connect to the mail server.

f. To change the mapping of data fields, click Mapping Settings button.
these fields, you can map existing fields of the mail you have selected.

button, you can map a field from the mail to that newly created field.


g. Click Done.

NOTE: Any attachments are disregarded and are not published.

IMPORTANT: Every mail that is successfully retrieved is deleted from the POP3 server.

Publish as… section In this section, you can choose how to publish the content you have selected in the previous step.
By default the content is published as RSS feed.

 You can delete the automatically generated RSS feed or other publishing method by clicking
with the quick info text Remove.

 You can change the settings of the publishing method by clicking Settings… button.

 You can add another method of export by clicking Add more… button.
The Select content export method window appears. Select one of the following radio buttons:

SITEFINITY CONTENT
To publish the selected content as content in Sitefinity, for example, publish blog posts as news items,
perform the following procedure:

a. In Import data as dropdown box, select whether to publish the selected content as Blogs, News,

98

or Events.

b. If you select Automatically publish imported data, the items will be imported in status Published,
otherwise, the will be imported as Draft.

In the window that appears, you have a list of the existing data fields of the Sitefinity content
types. To these fields, you can map fields of the feed you are creating.

button, you can map this newly created field to a field of the content type. The content type
fields, which can be mapped, can be both predefined and custom fields. For more information,
see Adding custom fields to content items.


d. Click Done.

RSS FEED
To publish the selected content as RSS feed, perform the following procedure:

a. In RSS or Atom to generate? radio button group, select the format for the feed.

b. In URL name, enter a URL of the feed.

c. Choose how many items to include in the feed by selecting one of the following radio buttons:

 Include the newest <number> items
In the input field, enter how many of the published items you want to display.

 Include all published items
The feed displays all items that are published.

d. Choose how to display the items in the feeds by selecting one of the following:

 Title and content.
 Title and first <number> characters.
 Title only.
e. To change the mapping of data fields, click Mapping Settings button.
these fields, you can map fields of the RSS or Atom feed you.

button, you can map a field from the RSS or Atom feed to that newly created field.


f. Click Done.

TWITTER FEED
To publish the selected content as a Twitter feed, for example, publish your blog posts as tweets,
perform the following procedure:

a. In Which Twitter application to use? select an application via which you want to publish your
tweets.
The list contains all Twitter applications which you have registered in Twitter and in Sitefinity.

For more information, see Managing Twitter applications.

When you select an application, in Select Twitter user for publishing, a list of all Twitter users
registered for this application appear.

b. Select the Twitter user from whose account the tweets will be published.
For example, you can register an application MyNews, but you can associate two accounts with
that application – sports and weather. Some people may follow only the sports other may follow
only the weather.

For more information about associating Twitter users accounts with an application, see Managing

99

Twitter applications.

In the window that appears, you have a list of the data fields of the Twitter feed you are creating.
To these fields, you can map fields of the feed you are creating.

button, you can map this newly created field to one of the Twitter fields.


d. Click Done.

The system saves the feed and returns you to Feeds & Notifications page.

| Creating and editing feeds | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

EDITING, DELETING, FILTERING, AND VIEWING FEEDS

EDITING A FEED
1. To edit a feed, on Feeds & Notifications page, click the feed you want to edit.
The Edit a feed page appears.

2. Perform procedure Creating a feed  Step 3 to Step 8.

DELETING FEEDS
To delete one or more feeds, on Feeds & Notifications page, perform one of the following:

 Select one or more feeds and click Delete button in the function bar of the page.

 Click the Actions link of the respective feed and click Delete.


FILTERING FEEDS
You can filter feeds, using one of the following options in the right side of Feeds & Notifications page:

 To filter feeds created by you, under Filter feeds click My feeds.

 To filter feeds according to their status, under Filter feeds click Active feeds or Inactive feeds.

 To filter feeds according to the date of their last update, under Filter feeds click By last publication.
The Display feeds last updated in... pane appears.

 When you click a time interval, the system displays all the feeds updated during this time interval.

 To display feeds updated during some custom period of time, click Custom range… link.
Use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup, and the time picker, by clicking
with the quick info text Open the time view popup, to define a custom filtering interval and click Filter.

The system displays all filtering options, but displays the last filtering you have chosen until you choose something else.

 To filter feeds according to the content type they are displaying, under Feeds by content type click Blogs, News, or Events.

| Creating and editing feeds | Creating and uploading content | Table of contents |

DEFINING SEARCH INDEXES
You use search indexes to define different sets of content to be searched, using the internal search of your website. To configure
your website’s internal search, you must first define a search index and then drop the Search and Search results widget
somewhere on your website.

You create search indexes in one of the following ways:

1. Open the Search index page by clicking Administration  Search indexes.

100

2. On Search indexes page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any search indexes, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more indexes, the system displays a list all created indexes and the following button in
the function bar of Search indexes page:

3. Click Create a search index.
The Create a search index page appears.

4. In Name input field, enter the name of the search index.

5. In Scope section, you select which content will be indexes.
For example, you can create a search index that contains all news. When a user enters a search word, it will be applied to all
news items on your website.

You can index the following:

 News items
 Events
 Blog Posts
 Content Items
 Static HTML in pages
The system searches the HTML of pages.

6. When you select a content type for indexing, you must choose the default page that this type is published on. To do this, click
Change button of the respective content type.
7. When you are finished, click Create this search index.


DEFINING AND MANAGING A WORKFLOW
In Sitefinity you can create a workflow for managing the lifecycle of content items and pages. You do that by creating first and
second level of approval for content items and pages, or by uploading your custom workflow.

TYPES OF WORKFLOW
In Sitefinity the following types of workflow exist:

Type of workflow Lifecycle steps Rights

Standard lifecycle Create and Publish All users with proper permissions.
management

Approval before Create and Send for Approval   Create and send for approval
publishing Publish All users with proper permissions.

 Publish
Users set as approvers in the workflow definition.

2 levels of approval Create and Send for Approval   Create and send for approval
before publishing Send for Publishing  Publish All users with proper permissions.

 Send for publishing
Users set as first level of approvers in the workflow definition.

101

 Publish
Users set as first level of approvers in the workflow definition.

By default you use the standard lifecycle workflow.

Using Sitefinity, you can create one or two level of approval for managing the lifecycle of content items and pages.

To define and manage workflows, in the main menu, click Administration  Workflow.
The Workflow page appears, displaying a list of all created workflow definitions together with actions you can perform on them.
Use this page to create, edit, and manage workflow definitions.

Section contents


Define a workflow
Use this procedure to create a workflow and set the content to which it applies and the responsible users.

Edit a workflow
Use this procedure to change the properties of a workflow ant to delete workflows.

Activate and deactivate a workflow
Use this procedure to make a workflow active or inactive.

PERMISSIONS FOR WORKFLOWS
Only users in the Administrators role can create and edit workflows.


DEFINING A WORKFLOW
1. On Workflows page perform one of the following:

 If you have not created any workflows, the system displays the following in the center of the screen:

 If you have already created one or more workflows, the system displays a list all created workflows and the following
button in the function bar of Workflows page:

2. Click Define a workflow or Create a workflow respectively.

3. In Workflow type radio button group, perform one of the following and click Continue:

 Approval before publishing
This workflow inserts one intermediate step of approval between the standard lifecycle workflow of creating and
publishing. In this case the lifecycle consist of creating, approving, and then publishing a content item or page.

 2 levels of approval before publishing
This workflow inserts two intermediate steps of approval between the standard lifecycle workflow of creating and
publishing. In this case the lifecycle consist of creating, first level of approving, second level of approving, and then
publishing a content item or page.

 Custom workflow
In this case you can upload any kind of workflow you have created. It can have your own level of approvals and scenarios
and your own buttons, messages, and labels.

a. Click Select button, and browse your computer for the workflow file.

NOTE: The workflow file must be a .xamlx file.

b. Click Upload.

102

c. Skip the rest of this procedure.

The Define a workflow: Properties window appears.

4. In Name input field, enter a name for the workflow.

5. In Set approvers section, click Add roles or users button.
The Select roles or users window appears. Under Roles tab, the system displays all available roles, under Users, the system
displays all created users.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the users set as approvers have permissions to create and modify the respective content

6. Select one or more Roles or Users that will have the right to approve content items or pages and click Done selecting.

NOTE: The Administrators role is set as approver by default. It is not displayed in Select roles or users.

You can delete selected roles or users using button.

7. To add more roles, click Add roles or users button again and perform Step 6.

8. If you select Notify users by email when an item is waiting for their approval checkbox, every time an item or page is set in
status Awaiting approval, all users assigned as approvers will receive a notification via email.

PREREQUISITE: In order for the system to be able to send emails, you must configure the SMTP settings. For more
information, see Sitefinity Installation and administration guide  System settings  Configuring SMTP settings.

NOTE: If you have chosen 2 levels of approval before publishing checkbox, the system displays Set approvers for Level 1 and
Set approvers for Level 2 sections. In both sections you perform Step 5 to Step 8. You can choose different roles or users to
be approvers on each level.

9. In Scope section, define where the workflow applies, by selecting one of the following:

 All content and pages.
The workflow will apply to all content items created using the content modules, except Forms. The workflow does not
apply on categories and tags.

 Selected only
10. Select the checkboxes of the content items or pages, whose lifecycle you want to change.

11. If you select Allow administrators to skip the workflow checkbox, the administrators will not have to go through the workflow
when creating or editing a page or a content item. In this case, the standard lifecycle workflow will apply to administrators
only.

NOTE: You cannot allow approvers, selected above, to skip the workflow. The approvers must enter the workflow, but they
will have permissions to also approve the items they have set in status Awaiting approval for the level of approval that they
have permissions for.

12. To apply the workflow, select Activate workflow immediately.
The workflow becomes active immediately after you save it.

13. Click one of the following:

 Save workflow
The workflow is created and the system returns you to Workflows page.

 Back to workflow types
The system returns you to Step 3.

 Cancel
The system returns you to Workflows page without saving the workflow.

| Defining and managing a workflow | Table of contents |

EDITING A WORKFLOW
 Editing the properties of a workflow

1. Go to the Workflows page and open the workflow for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the workflow you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective workflow.

103


The Edit a workflow page appears.

2. Perform procedure Defining a workflow  Step 4 to Step 12.

3. When you are finished, click Save workflow.

NOTE: You cannot edit the type of the workflow. If you want to change the level of approvals, you must create a new
workflow.

 Deleting a workflow
To delete a workflow, on Workflows page, perform one of the following:

 Select one or more workflows and click Delete button in the function bar.

 Click the Actions link of the respective workflow and click Delete.


ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING A WORKFLOW
1. Go to the Workflows page and open the workflow for editing in one of the following ways:

 Click the workflow you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective workflow.

2. To activate or deactivate the workflow, select or deselect the Activate workflow immediately checkbox.

3. The system changes the status of the workflow to one of the following:

 Active, denoted by .

 Inactive, denoted by .


MANAGING THE STATUS OF CONTENT ITEMS AND PAGES
In Sitefinity all content items, such as news, events, and images, comments left on the website about the content items, as well as
pages have statuses. Statuses help you manage the lifecycle of a content item or page.

In Sitefinity there are also statuses that indicate that a workflow is applied to item or page. Such statuses are Awaiting approval
and Rejected. The workflow introduces one or two levels of approval before an item or page becomes visible on the website. For
more information about rights to publish, see Defining and managing a workflow.

Section content

Types of statuses
Use this section as a reference to all types of statuses a content item can have, as well as the icons that denote different
statuses.

Set the status of a content item or page
When you finish creating or editing your content item, in the last step, you must set its status. Use this procedure to set the
status of content items and pages that you have just created or edited. If you need to edit an item or page as first or second
level of approver, use the following two procedures.

Manage a page or content item that is Awaiting approval
Use this procedure to edit and approve content items or pages in status Awaiting approval. To be able to edit such items or
pages you must be assigned as approver in Approval before publishing type of workflow or as first level of approver in 2 levels
of approval before publishing type of workflow.
Manage a content item or page that is Awaiting publishing
Use this procedure to edit and approve content items or pages in status Awaiting publishing. To be able to edit such items or
pages you must be assigned as second level of approver in 2 levels of approval before publishing type of workflow.

Change the status of a published content item

104

Use this procedure to manage the status of a published item or page. To be able to manage a published item, you must have
the rights to publish it. For more information about rights to publish, see Defining and managing a workflow.


TYPES OF STATUSES
A content item or page can be in one of following states:

 Published
The content is visible on the website to users with permissions to view it.
When a content item or page is published, in the list of content items or pages, the system displays .

 Draft
Draft is not publically visible on the website.
When a content item or page is a Draft, in the list of content items or pages, the system displays .

When a content item or page is a Draft (newer than published), in the list of content items or pages, the system displays .

 Private draft
The private draft is not visible on the website and administration area. It can be opened only by its owner or the
administrator.
When a content item or page is in status Private draft, the system displays the following:

 To its owner: Private draft.

 To everybody else: Locked by <Name of owner> | Private draft.
NOTE: Comments left on the website cannot be with draft status.

 Scheduled
The content item or page has been assigned date and time when it will be automatically published or unpublished on the
website.
When a content item is scheduled for publishing or unpublishing, in the list of content items, the system displays .

 Awaiting approval
The content item or page has been sent for approval. It is not publically visible on the website.
When a content item is Awaiting approval or Awaiting approval (newer than published), in the list of content items or pages,
the system displays .

NOTE: To have a content item or page in status Awaiting approval you must use Approval before publishing or 2 levels of
approval before publishing type of workflow.
 Awaiting publishing
The content item is sent for publishing after it has been approved. It is not publically visible on the website.
When a content item is Awaiting publishing or Awaiting publishing (newer than published) in the list of content items or pages,
the system displays .

NOTE: To have a content item or page in status Awaiting publishing you must use 2 levels of approval before publishing type
of workflow.

 Rejected
The content item has been rejected by the responsible user after it has been sent for approval.
When a content item is Rejected in the list of content items or pages, the system displays .

NOTE: To have a content item or page in status Rejected you must use Approval before publishing or 2 levels of approval
before publishing type of workflow.
IMPORTANT: In next to any of the above statuses, the system displays in brackets (newer than published), it means that the
content item or page has an older version that is published on the website. For more information about the currently published
version, see Viewing version history of a content item and Viewing version history of a page.

 Unpublished
The content item or page is not publically visible.

NOTE: You can only unpublish a content item or page that is published.

When a content item or page is unpublished, in the list of content items or pages, the system displays .

105

 Locked for editing
The content item cannot be opened, because it is being edited by another user.
When a content item is edited by another user, in the list of content items, the system displays next to the item.

NOTE: A blog does not have a status.

NOTE: Group pages do not have status, because they do not have content. On Pages page they are represented by .

STATUS FOR COMMENTS
Comments left on the website can have status Publish when they are publically visible and the following statuses, when they are
not visible on the website.

 Hidden
This status is only used for comments left on the website by users. A hidden comment is not publically visible on the website.
When a comment is hidden, in the list of comments, the system displays next to the comment.

 Spam
This status is only used for comments left on the website by users. A comment marked as spam is hidden and not publically
visible on the website.
When a comment is spam, in the list of comments, the system displays next to the comment.
| Managing the status of content items and pages | Table of contents |

SETTING THE STATUS OF A NEW PAGE OR CONTENT ITEM
After you have finished creating properties or the content of page or a content item, you must set its status. This procedure
describes the options you have for publishing, scheduling, and saving your content items or pages if you are using a Standard
lifecycle management (Standard workflow), Approval before publishing (one level of approval) type of workflow, and 2 levels of
approval before publishing type of workflow. Use this procedure to set the status of a newly created page or content item.
Depending on the workflow type that is active, the system will display different options for setting the status:

Workflow type Procedure

Standard lifecycle When finished creating or editing a content item or a page, select one of the following:
management
 Publish
The content item or page is assigned status Published.

NOTE: Only when you upload new images, videos, and documents this button is labeled Upload and
Publish.
 Save as Draft
The content item or page is assigned status Draft.

NOTE: When you upload new images, videos, and documents, this button is labeled Upload and Save
as Draft.
 More actions
From the dropdown box, select one of the following:

 Schedule Publish/Unpublish
A window opens, where you use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the
calendar popup, and the time picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view
popup, to schedule a publishing and expiration (if any) date and time for the content item or page.
When you select the dates, click Schedule.

The content item or page is assigned status Scheduled.

 Delete

NOTE: This option appears only after you have saved a content item. Before you have saved a
content item, you cannot delete it and instead of More actions button the system displays Schedule
Publish/Unpublish button.

106

NOTE: The More actions button does not appear when you upload images, videos, and documents.

Approval before When finished creating or editing a content item or page, select one of the following:
publishing
 Send for Approval
The content item or page is assigned status Awaiting approval.

NOTE: When you upload new images, videos, and documents this button is labeled Upload and Send
for Approval.
IMPORTANT: If you are not assigned as approver in Approval before publishing type of workflow, you
are not able to open an item after it is sent for approval.

For more information, see Managing a page or content item that is Awaiting approval.

 Save as Draft

NOTE: When you upload new images, videos, and documents this button is labeled Upload and Save
as Draft, which uploads the item in status Draft.
NOTE: If you are an administrator and you are allowed to skip the workflow, use the procedure for standard
lifecycle management.

2 levels of When finished creating or editing a content item or page, select one of the following:
approval before
publishing

NOTE: Only when you upload new images, videos, and documents this button is labeled Upload and
Send for Approval.
IMPORTANT: If you are not assigned as approver in 2 levels of approval before publishing type of
workflow, you are not able to open an item after it is sent for approval.


 Save as Draft

NOTE: When you upload new images, videos, and documents the button is labeled Upload and Save as
Draft, which uploads the item in status Draft.
 Delete

NOTE: This option appears only after you have saved a content item. Before you have saved a content
item, you cannot delete it.

NOTE: If you are an administrator and you are allowed to skip the workflow, use the procedure for standard
lifecycle management.

If you are creating a page and in page content editing mode, you click Back to Pages, the system saves the page in status Draft.
If when you are creating a content item, you click Back to <content type> without having saves the item as draft, the system does
not save the content item you were creating.


The following flowchart displays all available steps when you are creating a content item or page:

107

For more information about the statuses of a content item, see Types of statuses.


MANAGING A PAGE OR CONTENT ITEM THAT IS DRAFT, UNPUBLISHED, OR REJECTED
After you have finished editing the content of a page or a content item, you must set its status. This procedure describes the
options you have for publishing, scheduling, and saving your content items or pages if you are using a Standard lifecycle
management (Standard workflow), Approval before publishing (one level of approval) type of workflow, and 2 levels of approval
before publishing type of workflow. Use this procedure to set the status of the following types of content items or pages:
 Draft and Draft (newer than published)
 Unpublished
 Rejected
You can have this status of an item or page only if you are using either Approval before publishing or 2 levels of approval
before publishing type of workflow.
NOTE: If you want to edit a published or scheduled content item or page, you must first open it and save it as draft. If you are
using Approval before publishing or 2 levels of approval before publishing type of workflow and you want to manage an item or
page in status Published or Scheduled, see procedures Managing a page or content item that is Published and Managing a page or
content item that is Scheduled respectively.

NOTE: If you are using Approval before publishing or 2 levels of approval before publishing type of workflow and you want to
manage an item or page in status Awaiting approval or Awaiting publishing, see procedures Managing a page or content item that
is Awaiting approval and Managing a page or content item that is Awaiting publishing respectively.



Standard lifecycle When finished editing a content item or a page, select one of the following:
management
 Publish

 Save as Draft

 More actions

108

 Discard Draft
This link is available only when you have opened a page or content item in status Draft (newer than
published). When you click it you delete the created draft and leave only the published version.
popup, to schedule a publishing and expiration (if any) date and time for the content item or page.

 Delete

Approval before When finished creating or editing a content item or page, select one of the following:
publishing
or The content item or page is assigned status Awaiting approval.

2 levels of IMPORTANT: If you are not assigned as approver in Approval before publishing type of workflow or as
approval before first level of approver in 2 levels of approval before publishing type of workflow, you are not able to open
publishing an item after it is sent for approval.


 Save as Draft

 Delete

NOTE: If you have opened a page or item in status Draft (newer than published) you have an additional
function Discard Draft. When this option is available, the More action button appears, containing Discard
Draft and Delete links. When you click Discard Draft you delete the created draft and leave only the
published version.

NOTE: If you are an administrator and you are allowed to skip the workflow, perform the procedure for
standard lifecycle management.

IMPORTANT: If you have opened for editing a content item or page that has a published version, the system displays (newer
than published) after the status of the content item or page. For more information, see Types of statuses.

The following flowchart displays all available steps when you have opened for editing a content item or page in status Draft,
Unpublished, Rejected:

109

NOTE: If you have opened for editing an item in status Draft (newer than published), you have an additional option – Discard
draft. If you click it, all changes since the last published version of the item are deleted and the item is left in status Published.


MANAGING A PAGE OR CONTENT ITEM THAT IS AWAITING APPROVAL
If you are responsible for approving content items and pages, you must open and approve items that are in status Awaiting
approval or Awaiting approval (newer than published). Use this procedure to manage pages and content item in these statuses.
PREREQUISITES: To have a content item or page in status Awaiting approval or Awaiting approval (newer than published) you
must use Approval before publishing or 2 levels of approval before publishing type of workflow. To open such an item in editing
mode you must be assigned as approver in Approval before publishing type of workflow or as first level of approver in 2 levels of
approval before publishing type of workflow. For more information, see Defining and managing a workflow.


Approval before When you open a content item or page, which is in status Awaiting approval or Awaiting approval (newer than
publishing published), perform one of the following:
1. Make changes to the content item if required.
For more information, see the respective procedure in Using the content modules or Editing a page.

2. Select one of the following:

 Publish

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode and you publish a translation of a content item, all
translations of that item are published, regardless of their current status.

 Reject
A window appears where you can enter reasons for rejecting the content item or page.
When you click Reject publishing, the system returns the content item or page for editing on the
previous level. All users with the proper permissions can edit the item.
The content item or page is assigned status Rejected.

 More actions

 Save as Awaiting approval
Use this function if you have not finished approving the item and you want to keep its status.


popup, to schedule a publishing and expiration (if any) date and time for the content item or
page.


 Delete

2 levels of When you open a content item or page, which is in status Awaiting approval or Awaiting approval (newer than
approval before published), perform one of the following:
publishing

110


 Send for Publishing
The content item or page is assigned status Awaiting publishing.

IMPORTANT: If you are not assigned as second level of approver in 2 levels of approval before
publishing type of workflow, you are not able to open an item after it is sent for publishing.
For more information, see Managing a page or content item that is Awaiting publishing.

 Reject
When you click Reject publishing, the system returns the content item or page for editing on the
previous level. All users with the proper permissions can edit the item.
The content item or page is assigned status Rejected.

 More actions

 Save as Awaiting approval
Use this function if you have not finished approving the item and you want to keep its status.


 Delete

NOTE: If you have opened for editing a content item or page that has status Published or has an older published version, the
system displays (newer than published) after the status of the content item or page. For more information, see Types of statuses.


The following flowchart displays all available steps when you have opened for editing a content item or page in status Awaiting
approval:



MANAGING A CONTENT ITEM OR PAGE THAT IS AWAITING PUBLISHING
If you are responsible for publishing content items and pages, you must open and publish items that are in status Awaiting
publishing or Awaiting publishing (newer than published). Use this procedure to manage pages and content item in these statuses.
PREREQUISITES: To have a content item or page in status Awaiting publishing or Awaiting publishing (newer than published)
you must use 2 levels of approval before publishing type of workflow. To open such an item in editing mode you must be assigned

111

as second level of approver in 2 levels of approval before publishing type of workflow. For more information, see Defining and
managing a workflow.

When you open a content item or page, which is in status Awaiting publishing or Awaiting publishing (newer than published),



 Publish

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode and you publish a translation of a content item, all translations of that
item are published, regardless of their current status.

 Reject
When you click Reject publishing, the system returns the content item or page for editing on the previous level.
Users assigned as approver in Approval before publishing type of workflow or as first level of approver in 2 levels of
approval before publishing type of workflow can edit the item.

 More actions

 Save as Awaiting publishing
Use this function if you have not finished approving the item and you want to keep its status Awaiting publishing.

NOTE: If you have opened a page in status Awaiting publishing, there is a separate button in the toolbar for this
function.

A window opens, where you use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup, and
the time picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup, to schedule a publishing and
expiration (if any) date and time for the content item or page.


 Delete

NOTE: If you have opened for editing a content item or page that has status Published or has an older published version, the
system displays (newer than published) after the status of the content item or page. For more information, see Types of statuses.

The following flowchart displays all available steps when you have opened for editing a content item or page in status Awaiting
publishing:

112



MANAGING A PAGE OR CONTENT ITEM THAT IS PUBLISHED
Use this procedure to manage the status content items or pages in status Published. Everyone, who has permission to modify
content items, can open an item that is Published.

USERS WHO HAVE THE RIGHT TO PUBLISH CONTENT ITEMS
PREREQUISITES: To manage the status of a content item or page in status Published, you must have the right to publish
content items or pages. For more information about publishing rights, see Defining and managing a workflow  Types of
workflow.
When you open a content item in status Published, after finished editing it, you can perform the following actions, regardless of the
type of workflow you are using:

 Publish

 More actions

 Save as Draft
The content item or page is assigned status Draft (newer than published).

When you open a published version and save it as draft, the already published content item or page remains published on
the webpage, only a draft of it that can be edited is created. For more information about the currently published version,
see Viewing version history of a content item and Viewing version history of a page.

NOTE: If you are using the standard workflow type, there is a separate button in the toolbar for this function.

A window opens, where you use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup, and the
time picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup, to schedule a publishing and expiration (if
any) date and time for the content item or page.

The content item or page is assigned status Scheduled (newer than published).

NOTE: You cannot schedule a form.

 Unpublish
The content item or page is assigned status Unpublished.

113

NOTE: If you are working in multilingual mode and you unpublish a translation of a content item, all translations of that
item are unpublished, regardless of their current status.

 Delete

USERS WHO DO NOT HAVE THE RIGHT TO PUBLISH CONTENT ITEMS
If you are not assigned as approver in Approval before publishing type of workflow or as first level of approver in 2 levels of
approval before publishing type of workflow, you can still open a Published content item. You can edit the content item and save it
as draft. This way, the Published version of the content item remains published. By saving a content item as draft, you create
another version of the content item that is draft and can be edited. The content item enters the workflow from the beginning.

NOTE: Workflows do not apply on forms and you do not need special right to unpublish a form. To do this, on Forms page click
the Actions link of the respective form and from the dropdown list, click Unpublish.

The following flowchart displays all available steps when you have opened for editing a content item or page in status Published:



MANAGING A PAGE OR CONTENT ITEM THAT IS SCHEDULED
Use this procedure to manage the status content items or pages in status Scheduled. Everyone, who has permission to modify
content items, can open an item that is Schedule.

USERS WHO HAVE THE RIGHT TO PUBLISH CONTENT ITEMS
PREREQUISITES: To manage the status of a content item or page in status Scheduled, you must have the right to publish or
schedule a content items or pages. For more information about publishing rights, see Defining and managing a workflow  Types
of workflow.
NOTE: Forms cannot be scheduled to be published.

When you open a content item in status Scheduled, after finished editing it, you can perform the following actions, regardless of
the type of workflow you are using:

 Publish

 More actions

 Stop Schedule
If you click this link, the item is no more scheduled for publishing. It returns to its previous state:

 Draft
If you are using Standard workflow.

 Awaiting approval
If you are using Approval before publishing workflow.

114

 Awaiting publishing
If you are using 2 levels of approval before publishing workflow.

 Save as Draft

NOTE: If you are using the standard workflow type, there is a separate button in the toolbar for this function.

A window opens, where you use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup, and the
time picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup, to schedule a publishing and expiration (if
any) date and time for the content item or page.


 Delete

USERS WHO DO NOT HAVE THE RIGHT TO PUBLISH CONTENT ITEMS
If you are not assigned as approver in Approval before publishing type of workflow or as first level of approver in 2 levels of
approval before publishing type of workflow, you can still open a Scheduled content item. You can edit the content item and save it
as draft. The content item enters the workflow from the beginning.

The following flowchart displays all available steps when you have opened for editing a content item or page in status Schedule:



DISPLAYING CONTENT USING WIDGETS
To display content you use widgets. The widgets are controls which you drop on the page (in page content editing mode) and
configure them to display already existing content. If you do not create content first, the widgets have nothing to display. You
create content using the content modules on the Content tab.

You display the content you have created with these content modules using the widgets. You can configure the widgets to display
different part of content, by combining widgets and by tagging and classifying content. You display the content you have created
on Content tab using widgets.

Section contents

115

Adding widgets on your page
Use this procedure to add widget on your page and to open the configuration mode of widgets.

Content widgets group
The Content widget group contains widgets which you use to display reusable content you have created on Content tab.

Navigation widgets group
The Navigation widget group contains widgets that you use to display website navigation and archive of content items you
have created on Content tab.

 RadControls widget group
To use RadControls you must be an advanced user or developer.
For more information, see RadControls for ASP.NET AJAX on http://www.telerik.com/help/aspnet-ajax/introduction.html.

 Data widget group
The widgets from this widget group can be configured only in advanced mode.
For more information, see Advanced configuration of widgets.

Scripts and styles widgets group
The Scripts and Styles widgets group contains widgets that you use to apply style to the page or to enhance the page with
additional functionality.

Login widgets group
The Login widgets group contains widgets that you use to provide your website users with the ability to login, to display the
currently logged user and login or logout links.

Search widgets group
Use the Search widget to add and configure a search box to a page. After you have created one or more search indexes, you
use the Search widget to select indexes to be used for the search.

Users widgets group
The Users widgets group contains widgets that you use to display lists of users, user registration form and provide the user
with the ability to change profile information, such as password or email.

Classifications widgets group
The Classifications widgets group contains widgets that you use to display lists of categories and tags on your website. You
use the categories and the tags to filter the content of the pages.

Newsletters widgets group
The Newsletters widgets group contains widgets that you use to display subscription and unsubscription forms to the visitors
of your website.

Advanced configuration of widgets
In Advanced configuration mode you can configure individual properties of the widget. To use this mode you must be an
advanced user or a developer.

Widgets configuration modes reference
This is a table displaying which configuration modes – simple and advanced are available for each widget.

CONFIGURING WIDGETS WHILE BROWSING THE WEBSITE
You can create, edit, and upload content while you are browsing the website. You do not need to open the website in the backend;
you can use the inline editing function to edit your website directly while browsing it. Using the direct inline editing, you can see
how the items you are editing look in the context of the website.

For more information about inline editing, see Creating and editing content while browsing the website.


ADDING WIDGETS ON YOUR PAGE
You add widgets in page content editing mode.

1. To edit the content of a page, on Pages page, perform one of the following:

 Click the page you want to edit.

 Click the Actions link of the respective page.
From the dropdown list click Content.

116

The page opens in content editing mode.

2. Click Content button in the upper-right corner of the page.
A list of widget groups appears.

3. Expand a widget group, choose a widget and drag and drop it on the desired place on the page.
The following screenshot shows dragging and dropping of the Image widget in an empty screen element:

NOTE: You can drag and drop a widget both inside a layout element and outside it. Select a widget and drag it to the desired
place. The system suggests you where you can drop the widget.

Once you have added widget on your page, you need to configure it to display the proper content.

4. To do this, click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The following screenshot shows the Edit button:

Widgets have the following ways of configuration:

 Simple mode
Simple mode is the user friendly way of configuring a widget. When you click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the
widget, the Simple configuration mode is displayed by default.

 Advanced mode
In Advanced configuration mode you can configure individual properties of the widget. To use this mode you must be an
advanced user or a developer.

NOTE: Some widgets do not have Simple configuration mode. You still can configure those widgets using the Advanced mode,
which is displayed by default for widgets that do not have Simple mode. Some widgets can only be configured in simple mode.
For a list of all widgets with their available configuration modes, see Widgets configuration modes reference.

5. For more functions of the widget, click More button in the upper-right corner of the widget and select one of the following:

 To remove the widget from the page, click Delete.
The system removes the widget without confirmation.

 To add the same widget once again, click Duplicate.
The system adds the same widget to the page and duplicates also the configuration that you have made so far.

 To set permissions for that particular widget, click Permissions and perform procedure Sitefinity Installation and
Administration Guide  Changing global and section permissions  Step 2 to Step 4.

| Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

CONTENT WIDGETS GROUP
The Content widget group contains widgets which you use to display reusable content you have created on Content tab.

Section contents

117

The following widgets are part of the Content widget group (alphabetically ordered):

Blog posts
Use this widget to display already created blog posts.

Content block
Use this widget to enter content directly using the text editor and its features.

Document link
Use this widget to display a link to a single document on your page. You can choose a document from the already uploaded or
upload a new document.

Download list
Use this widget to display a list or table of links to documents, where each document can be downloaded. You can choose
documents from the already uploaded or upload new documents.

Events
Use this widget to display already created events.

Feed
Use this widget to display RSS feed on your website.

Form
Use this widget to display all kind of forms you have created with the form builder.

Image
Use this widget to display a single image on your page. You can choose an image from the already uploaded or upload a new
image.

Image gallery
Use this widget to display a gallery of image thumbnails, where each image can be opened individually. You can choose
images from the already uploaded or upload new images.

List items
Use this widget to display already created lists with list items.

News
Use this widget to display already created news.

Video
Use this widget to display a single video on your page. You can choose a video from the already uploaded or upload a new
video.

Video gallery
Use this widget to display a gallery of video thumbnails, where each video can be played individually. You can choose videos
from the already uploaded or upload new videos.


CONFIGURING THE BLOG POSTS WIDGET
Use this widget to display already created blog posts.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one blog with at least one post in it. For more information, see Creating and editing
blogs and blog posts.

After you drag and drop the Blog posts widget on your page, the widget automatically displays all published blog posts.
To configure the display of the posts, perform the following:

Click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Blogs window appears where you can configure the following:

CONTENT
In content, you can choose the blogs from which you want to display posts.
In Which blog posts to display radio button select one of the following:

 From all blogs
All posts from all blogs are displayed.

118

 From selected blogs only…
The system displays posts only from the selected blog.

1. To select the blog, click Select a blog button.
A list of all created blogs appears.

2. Select the blog and click Done selecting.

 Under Narrow selection you can further specify which posts to display by choosing one of the following:

 All published posts from selected blogs
This is selected by default and displays all posts from the blogs selected in the previous step.

 One particular post only…
Select one post to display using the Select a blog post button.

 Selection of posts:
You can narrow the displayed posts, using categories, tags, and dates.
Select one or more of the following:

 by Categories…
Click the Select button to select the categories from which you want to display posts and click Done.

 by Tags…
Click Select button to select the tags, so that posts tagged with those particular tags will be displayed and click Done.

 by Dates…
Click Select button.
Select one of the predefined time intervals, so that posts created during that interval will be displayed or choose
Custom range… and use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup, and the time
picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup, to select a time interval. When finished click
Done.
For more information, see Creating and editing blogs and blog posts.

LIST SETTINGS
On this tab you choose how to display the posts you have selected.

 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the posts into pages.
In the input field you specify how many posts per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the posts you have chosen to display.
In the input field, you specify how many posts you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays all the posts that you have selected in Content tab.

 In Sort blog posts dropdown box, select a sorting criterion for the posts.

 In List template, select the template which is used to display the posts on the webpage.
You can create a custom template by clicking Create New Template. You can edit existing templates by selecting them and
clicking Edit.
For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget templates editor 
Creating and editing widget templates.

SINGLE ITEM SETTINGS
On this tab you choose the way to display a post when clicked.
In Open Single item in… radio button, select one of the following:

 Auto-generated page
When a post is clicked it is displayed in a page which is automatically generated and has the same layout as the current page.

 Select existing page…
You select a page from the existing pages with certain layout where the blog post will be displayed when clicked.

NOTE: In order to display the blog post, the page you have selected must have the Blog posts widget added.

1. Click Select page.
From the treeview, select the page where you want to display the post.

119

2. Click Done selecting.

 In Detail templates, select the template which is used to display the posts on the webpage.
clicking Edit.
When you are finished with all the settings, click Save.
The Blogs window closes and the Blog posts widget is configured to display the posts you have selected.
To test it, in the function bar of page content editing mode, click Preview button.


| Content widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

CONFIGURING THE CONTENT BLOCK WIDGET

ENTERING CONTENT
Use this widget to enter content directly using the text editor and its features. You can use the basic formatting options of the text
editor. You can type and format text, insert images, documents, and symbols, and paste already formatted text and tables from
Microsoft Word.

To do this, click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Edit window appears where the text editor is displayed.


USING SHARED CONTENT
With the Content block widget you can reuse already created and shared content and you can also share the content that you have
entered using the text editor. Shared content is stored in the Content blocks module.

1. Click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the Blog post widget.

2. To display shared content, click Select from existing shared content button.
A list of all created content blocks appears.

3. Select the content block you want to use and click Done selecting.
The shared content appears. You cannot edit a content that is shared, unless you explicitly open it for editing.

4. To edit a shared content, perform one of the following:

 Editing all instances of the shared content

a. Click Edit this content button.
You can edit the content.

IMPORTANT: The changes you make to the shared content apply to all pages, where the content is displayed. For
more information, see Editing content blocks  Status of pages after editing a shared content block.

b. Click Save changes.
The Content block widget closes and the content item is updated.

 Editing only the current content

a. Click Unshare.
The system creates a local version of the shared content block. You can edit and save this copy without affecting
other pages where the shared content is displayed.

b. Click Save.
The Content block widget closes.

SHARING CONTENT
1. Click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the Blog post widget.

2. Enter content using the text editor.

3. When finished, click Share this content across pages button.

120

4. Enter a name for the shared content and click Share this content.

The Content block widget closes. The content is shared and appears in the Content bocks module.

NOTE: When the content block widget is displaying shared content, its title bar looks in the following way:


CONFIGURING THE DOCUMENT LINK WIDGET
Use this widget to display a link to a single document on your page. You can choose a document from the already uploaded or
upload a new document.

After you drag and drop the Document link widget on your page you must configure it to display a link to a document.

The Insert a document or other file window appears where you choose between the following:

 From your computer
a. To upload a document, click Select…, browse your computer to find the document you want to upload and click
Open.
You can select and display a link to only one document.

b. In Where to store the uploaded document/files? dropdown box, select the library where you want to put the
document.

NOTE: If you want to store the documents or file in a new library, you must create it. To do this, click Create new
link.

 From already uploaded
a. In the left side of the window, select the library where the document or file you want to display is located.
The system displays all documents and files in this library.
You can display all uploaded documents and files by clicking All items.

b. Click the document to which you want to display a link.

For more information, see Uploading and editing documents and files.

The window closes and the Document link widget is configured to display a link to the document or file you have selected.



CONFIGURING THE DOWNLOAD LIST WIDGET
Use this widget to display a list or table of links to documents and files, where each document or file can be downloaded. You can
choose documents or files from the already uploaded or upload new.

After you drag and drop the Download list widget on your page you must configure it to display documents and files.


In the Download list window that appears, configure the following:

SELECTING THE DOCUMENTS AND FILES TO DISPLAY
On Documents & Files tab you select which documents and files to display in the list.


 All published documents and files
All documents and files that are uploaded and published will be displayed in the list.

 From selected library…

121

The Download list displays documents and files only from a certain library.

1. To select a library, click Choose.
The Choose library window appears

2. Select the library, whose documents and files you want to display, and click Done selecting.

For more information, see Uploading and editing documents and files.

 Upload new…
In Sort documents and files, select a sorting criterion for the list of documents and files.

CHOOSING HOW TO DISPLAY THE DOCUMENTS AND FILES
On Settings tab you select the way the list of documents and files is displayed.

1. In Select type radio button group, choose one of the following:

List In Fine tune the selected type the Display icons radio button group appears.

Select the size of the icons that you want to be displayed in the list or select No icons.

On the webpage, the documents and files are displayed in a list with their names, file types, and file sizes.
If you have added description of the document or file, it is displayed as tooltip text when you hover over the
name of the document or file.
You can download the files by clicking their names.

NOTE: You can edit the way the widget displays the download list, by clicking Edit Thumbnail list template.
For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget
templates editor  Creating and editing widget templates.

Table In Fine tune the selected type the Display icons checkbox appears.
Select the checkbox, if you want to display document and file icons in the table next to the Download link.

The documents and files are displayed in a table, containing file names, file types, file sizes, date of upload
of files, and a Download link.
You can download the files by clicking the Download link.


List+Detail In Fine tune the selected type the Position of the Download link on the Detail page checkbox groups
page appears.

 Bellow the description
On the details page the link for the download of the document or file appears bellow the file name and
the description (if you have added a file description).

 Above the description
above the description (if you have added a file description).

 Bellow the description and Above the description
On the details page the link for the download of the document or file appears once bellow the file name
and above the description and once again bellow the description (if you have added a file description).
Use this option if the description of the file is long.

The documents and files are displayed in a list. The list contains the file names.

When you click the name of a document or file, a page with details opens.

122

On the details page, the system displays the name of the file. The link for downloading the file, which is
displayed where you have selected above. Bellow the Download link, the file type and file size are displayed.

NOTE: You can edit the way the widget displays the detailed page, by clicking Edit Detail page template.

Table+Detail In Fine tune the selected type the Display icons in the table checkbox appears, which you select if you want
page to display document and file icons in the table next to the Download link, and Position of the Downloaded
link on the Detail page checkbox group appears, where you select one of the following:
 Bellow the description
the description (if you have added a file description).

 Above the description
above the description (if you have added a file description).

 Bellow the description and Above the description
On the details page the link for the download of the document or file appears once bellow the file name
and above the description and once again bellow the description (if you have added a file description).
Use this option if the description of the file is long.

The documents and files are displayed in a table, containing file names, file types, file sizes, date of upload
of files, and a Download link.

When you click the name of a document or file, a page with details opens.
On the details page, the system displays the name of the file. The link for downloading the file, which is
displayed where you have selected above. Bellow the Download link, the file type and file size are displayed.

NOTE: You can edit the way the widget displays the detailed page, by clicking Edit Detail page template.

For more information about adding details to a document or file, see Editing properties of documents and files  Step 7.

2. In Fine tune the selected type, perform the following:

 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the list of documents and files into pages.
In the input field you specify how many documents or files per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the documents and files.
In the input field, you specify how many documents or files you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays all the documents and files that you have selected in
Documents & Files tab.
The Download list window closes and the Download list widget is configured to display links to the documents you have
selected.



CONFIGURING THE EVENTS WIDGET
Use this widget to display already created events.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one event. For more information, see Creating and editing events.

123

After you drag and drop the Events widget on your page, the widget automatically displays all published events.
To configure the display of the events, perform the following:

The Events window appears where you can configure the following:

CONTENT
In content, you can choose which events of all the created events you want to display.

1. In Which events to display? radio button select the events which you want to display.
The events are grouped according to the time for which they are scheduled. To display all events, select All upcoming, current,
and past events.
2. Under Narrow the selection you can further specify which events to display by choosing one of the following:

 All published events
This is selected by default and displays all events selected in the previous step.

 One particular event only…
Select one event to display using the Select an event button.

 Selection of events
You can narrow the displayed events, using categories, tags, and dates.

Click the Select button to select the categories from which you want to display events and click Done.

 by Tags…
Click Select button to select the tags, so that events tagged with those particular tags will be displayed and click
Done.
 by Dates…
Select one of the predefined time intervals, so that events created during that interval will be displayed or choose
Custom range… and use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup, and the time
picker, by clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup, to select a time interval. When finished click
Done.

LIST SETTINGS
On this tab you choose how to display the event(s) you have selected.

 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the events into pages.
In the input field you specify how many events per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the events you have chosen to display.
In the input field, you specify how many events you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays all the events that you have selected in Content tab.

 In Sort events dropdown box, select a sorting criterion for the events.

 In List template, select the template which is used to display the events on the webpage.
clicking Edit.

On this tab you choose the way to display the events.

When an event is clicked, it is displayed in a page which is automatically generated and has the same layout as the current
page.


124

You select a page from the existing pages with certain layout where an event will be displayed when clicked.

NOTE: In order to display the event, the page you have selected must have the Events widget added.

From the treeview, select the page where you want to display the event.


 In Detail templates, select the template which is used to display the events on the webpage.
clicking Edit.
The Events window closes and the Events widget is configured to display the event you have selected.



CONFIGURING THE FEED WIDGET
Use this widget to display RSS feed on your website.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one feed. For more information, see Creating and editing feeds.

After you drag and drop the Feed widget on your page you must configure it to display a feed.

The Feed window appears.

2. Select the feed to be displayed on the page by clicking Select a feed button.
From the list of feeds that appears, select one feed and click Done selecting.

NOTE: The Feed widget can display only one feed, if you want to display more feeds, add more Feed widgets to your page.

3. Choose how to display the feed by selecting one of the following in Insert… radio button group:

 Links both in the page and in the browser address-bar
The system displays a clickable link on the page that leads to the RSS feed. The browser also automatically detects the
RSS feed published by the page, and displays link in the address bars of Mozilla Firefox, Safari, and Google Chrome or
in the toolbar of Internet Explorer.

 Link in the browser address-bar only
The system does not display a clickable link on the page, but the browser automatically detects the RSS feed published by
the page, and displays link in the address bars of Mozilla Firefox, Safari, and Google Chrome or in the toolbar of
Internet Explorer.

 Link in the page only
The system displays a clickable link on the page that leads to the RSS feed.

4. In Text to display input field, enter the text which is displayed as title of the feed.
By default the title of the feed is displayed, or if the feed was created when creating a blog, the name of the blog is displayed.

5. In Icon radio button group, select the type of icon that is displayed with the feed.

6. If you click More options, you can configure the following:

 You can add a tooltip text for the feed that is displayed when you hover over the RSS link.

 You can assign a CSS class name to the feed in case you want to style the link later.

 You can choose to open the feed in a new window, by selecting Open this link in a new window checkbox.




125

CONFIGURING THE FORM WIDGET
Use this widget to display all kind of forms you have created with the form builder.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one form. For more information, see Creating and editing forms.

After you drag and drop the Form widget on your page you must configure it to display a form.

The Select a form window appears displaying a list of all created forms.

2. Select the form you want to display on the page.
If you want to display more than one form, you must add the Form widget more than one times.

3. When you are finished, click Done selecting.
The Select a form window closes and the Form widget is configured to display the form you have selected.


CONFIGURING THE IMAGE WIDGET
Use this widget to display a single image on your page. You can choose an image from the already uploaded or upload a new
image.

After you drag and drop the Image widget on your page you must configure it to display an image.

The Insert an image window appears where you choose between the following:

c. To upload an image, click Select…, browse your computer to find the image you want to upload and click Open.
You can select and display only one image.

d. In Where to store the uploaded image? dropdown box, select the album where you want to put the image.

NOTE: If you want to store the image in a new album, you must create it. To do this, click Create new link.

e. In Alternative text input field, enter text that is used for accessibility reasons and by search engines.

a. In the left side of the window, select the album where the image you want to display is located.
The system displays all images in this album.
You can display all uploaded images by clicking All items.

b. Click the image you want to display.

For more information, see Uploading and editing images.

2. If you want to display the image in size different than its original size, in Resizing options, select Resize the image width to…
radio button.

a. From the dropdown box that appears, select the width to which you want to resize the image.
If you select Custom size… the Width input field appears where you enter the desired width in pixels.

b. If you want the user to be able to view the image in its original size by clicking it, select the Clicking the resized image
opens the image in its original size checkbox.
The Insert an image window closes and the Image widget is configured to display the image you have selected.



CONFIGURING THE IMAGE GALLERY WIDGET
Use this widget to display a gallery of image thumbnails, where each image can be opened individually. You can choose images
from the already uploaded or upload new images.

126

After you drag and drop the Image gallery widget on your page you must configure it to display images.

The Image Gallery window appears, containing two tabs.

IMAGES TAB
On Images tab you select which images to display in the gallery.

 All published images
All images that are uploaded and published are displayed in the gallery.

 From selected album…
The Image gallery displays images only from a certain album.

1. To select an album, click Choose.
The Choose Album window appears

2. Select the album, whose images you want to display, and click Done selecting.

For more information, see Uploading and editing images.

 Upload new images…
 In Sort Images, select a sorting criterion for the images in the gallery.

SETTINGS TAB
On Settings tab you select the way the images in the gallery are displayed when opened.

Thumbnails + The image gallery displays the images as thumbnails. The description of the images is displayed in tooltip text.
Detailed page When clicked, the image is displayed in a bigger size in the same page together with image title, the user that
has uploaded the image, the date of upload, and the description.

In Fine tune the selected type, perform the following:


 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the list of image thumbnails into pages.
In the input field you specify how many image thumbnails per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the image thumbnails.
In the input field, you specify how many image thumbnails you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays thumbnails of all the images that
you have selected in Images tab.

2. In Size of thumbnails dropdown box, select the size in pixels for the image thumbnails.

3. In Size of big image dropdown box, select the size in pixels, in which the image will appear when clicked.

4. If you want to display links to the previous and the next image, select Show links to the previous and next
image as… checkbox.
You use the radio buttons, which appear, to select how to display the links. Choose one of the following:

 Text Links
 Thumbnails to previous and next image
NOTE: You can edit the way the widget displays the list of images, by clicking Edit Thumbnail list template and
the detailed display of an image by clicking Edit Detail page template. For more information, see Sitefinity
Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget templates editor  Creating and editing widget
templates.

Thumbnails + The image gallery displays the images as thumbnails. The description of the images is displayed in tooltip text.
Overlay When clicked, the image is displayed in a bigger size as an overlay of the page together with its description.
(lightbox)


127

 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the list of image thumbnails into pages.
In the input field you specify how many image thumbnails per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the image thumbnails.
In the input field, you specify how many image thumbnails you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays thumbnails of all the images that
you have selected in Images tab.


NOTE: You can edit the way the widget displays the list of images, by clicking Edit Thumbnail list template. For
more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget templates

Thumbnail The image gallery displays a horizontal strip of image thumbnails. When you click an image from the strip, a
strip + Image preview of the image is displayed above the thumbnail strip.
on the same
page
1. If you select Use limit checkbox, the system displays only a limited number of the images.
In the input field, you specify how many images or files you want to display.


3. If you want to display links to the previous and the next image, select Show links to the previous and next
image checkbox.
NOTE: You can edit the way the widget displays the list of images, by clicking Edit Thumbnail list template and
the detailed display of an image by clicking Edit Detail page template. For more information, see Sitefinity
Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget templates editor  Creating and editing widget
templates.

Simple list All images are displayed in a large size. The description of the images is displayed in tooltip text.



 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the list of images into pages.
In the input field you specify how many images per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the images.
In the input field, you specify how many images you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays all the images that you have
selected on Images tab.

2. In Size of images dropdown box, select the size in pixels in which to display the images in the list.

NOTE: You can edit the way the widget displays the list of images, by clicking Edit Thumbnail list template. For
more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget templates

The Image Gallery window closes and the Image gallery widget is configured to display the images you have selected.



CONFIGURING THE LIST ITEMS WIDGET
Use this widget to display already created lists with list items.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one list with at least one list item in it. For more information, see Creating and
editing lists.

After you drag and drop the List items widget on your page, the widget automatically displays all published list items.
To configure the display of the items, perform the following:

128

The Edit window appears where you can configure the following:

CONTENT
In content, you can choose the lists from which you want to display posts.
In Which lists to display radio button select one of the following:

1. Select a list by clicking Select a list button.
A list of all created blogs appears.

2. Select one or more lists and click Done selecting.

On this tab you choose the way to display a lists and list items.

 Simple list
The system displays a list of all items. This is a list of the titles of the list items, which cannot be clicked.

 Expanded list
The system displays a list of all items. Below each item, the system displays its content.

 Expandable list
The system displays a list of all items. This is a list of the titles of the list items. When you click a list item, its content appears.

 Anchor list
The system displays a list of all items. This is a list of the titles of the list items. Below the list the system displays the content
of the items. When you click an item, the system takes you to its content.

 Page list
The system displays a list of all items. This is a list of the titles of the list items. When you click an item, the system opens its
content on a separate page.

For each option that you choose, you can select a template that will be used to display the list. You can edit existing templates.
The Edit window closes and the List items widget is configured to display the lists you have selected.



CONFIGURING THE NEWS WIDGET
Use this widget to display already created news.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one news item. For more information, see Creating and editing news.

After you drag and drop the News widget on your page you must configure it to display selected news.

The News window appears where you can configure the following:

CONTENT
In content, you can choose which news of all the created news you want to display.
In Which news to display? radio button select one of the following:

 All published news
All created news are displayed.

 One particular news item only…
The system displays one news item.

1. To select the news you want to display, click Select news button.

129

A list of all news appears.

2. Select the news item and click Done selecting.

 Selection of news:
You can narrow the displayed news, using categories, tags, and dates.

Click the Select button to select the categories from which you want to display news and click Done.

 by Tags…
Click Select button to select the tags, so that news tagged with those particular tags will be displayed and click Done.

 by Dates…
Select one of the predefined time intervals, so that news created during that interval will be displayed or choose Custom
range… and use the calendar, by clicking with the quick info text Open the calendar popup, and the time picker, by
clicking with the quick info text Open the time view popup, to select a time interval. When finished click Done.

LIST SETTINGS
On this tab you choose how to display the news you have selected.

 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the news into pages.
In the input field you specify how many news per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the news you have chosen to display.
In the input field, you specify how many news you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays all the news that you have selected in Content tab.

 In Sort news dropdown box select a sorting criterion for the news.

 In List template, select the template which is used to display the news on the webpage.
clicking Edit.

On this tab you choose the way to display the news.

When a news item is clicked it is displayed in a page which is automatically generated and has the same layout as the current
page.

You select a page from the existing pages with certain layout where a news item will be displayed when clicked.

NOTE: In order to display the news, the page you have selected must have the News widget added.

From the treeview, select the page where you want to display the news.


 In Detail templates, select the template which is used to display the news on the webpage.
clicking Edit.
The News window closes and the News widget is configured to display the news you have selected.


130


CONFIGURING THE VIDEO WIDGET
Use this widget to display a single video on your page. You can choose a video from the already uploaded or upload a new video.

After you drag and drop the Video widget on your page you must configure it to display a video.

The Insert a video window appears where you choose between the following:

a. To upload a video, click Select…, browse your computer to find the video you want to upload and click Open.
You can select and display only one video.

b. In Where to store the uploaded video? dropdown box, select the library where you want to put the video.

NOTE: If you want to store the video in a new library, you must create it. To do this, click Create new link.

a. In the left side of the window, select the library where the video you want to display is located.
The system displays all videos in this library.
You can display all uploaded videos by clicking All items.

b. Click the video you want to display.

For more information, see Uploading and editing videos.

The Insert a video window closes and the Video widget is configured to display the video you have selected.



CONFIGURING THE VIDEO GALLERY WIDGET
Use this widget to display a gallery of video thumbnails, where each video can be played individually. You can choose videos from
the already uploaded or upload new videos.

After you drag and drop the Video gallery widget on your page you must configure it to display videos.

The Video Gallery window appears, containing two tabs.

VIDEOS TAB
On Videos tab you select which videos to display in the gallery.

 All published videos
All videos that are uploaded and published are displayed in the gallery.

 From selected library…
The Video gallery displays videos only from a certain library.

1. To select a library, click Choose.
The Choose Library window appears

2. Select the library, whose videos you want to display, and click Done selecting.

For more information, see Uploading and editing videos.

 Upload new videos…
 In Sort videos, select a sorting criterion for the videos in the gallery.

SETTINGS TAB
On Settings tab you select the way the videos in the gallery are displayed when opened.

131

1. In Select video gallery type area, select one of the following:

 Thumbnails + Detailed page
The video gallery displays the videos as thumbnails. The description of the video is displayed in tooltip text. When clicked,
the video is displayed in its original size in the same page together with video title, the user that has uploaded the video,
the date of upload, and the description.

 Thumbnails + Overlay (lightbox)
The video gallery displays the videos as thumbnails. The description of the videos is displayed in tooltip text. When
clicked, the video is displayed in its original size as an overlay of the page together with its description.

2. In Fine tune the selected type, perform the following:

 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the thumbnail list of videos into pages.
In the input field you specify how many video thumbnails per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the video thumbnails.
In the input field, you specify how many video thumbnails you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays all the videos that you have selected in Videos tab.

3. In Size of thumbnail dropdown box, select the width of the video thumbnail in pixels.

4. If you have chosen Thumbnails + Detailed page, perform the following:

a. In Size of the video dropdown box, select the size in pixels in which the video will be displayed when clicked.

b. Choose one or more of the following checkboxes:

 Show options for embedding
 Show related videos
 Allow full size
5. You can edit the way the widget displays the list of videos, by clicking Edit Thumbnail list template and the detailed display of
a video by clicking Edit Detail page template. For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates
 Using the Widget templates editor  Creating and editing widget templates.

The Video Gallery window closes and the Video gallery widget is configured to display the videos you have selected.



NAVIGATION WIDGETS GROUP
The Navigation widget group contains widgets that you use to display website navigation, language selector, and archive of
content items you have created on Content tab.

Section Contents

The following widgets are part of the Navigation group:

Navigation
Use this widget to display website navigation. The Navigation widget displays only visible pages.

Archive
Use the Archive widget to display published content items grouped by date on your page.

Language selector
Use the Language selector widget if you use multiple languages for your website. The widget allows the user to switch
between the different language versions of a page.


CONFIGURING THE NAVIGATION WIDGET
Use this widget to display website navigation. The widget displays only visible pages.

132

After you drag and drop the Navigation widget on your page you must configure it to display navigation links.

The Navigation window appears.

2. In What type of navigation to use? area, choose the type of navigation by selecting one of the following:

Horizontal
The system displays links to the pages horizontally (one next to the other). There is no hierarchy (no links to children
pages).

Horizontal with dropdown menus
The system displays links to the pages horizontally. If you select a parent page or a group page, the system displays all
children pages in a dropdown menu.

Horizontal with tabs
The system displays links to the pages horizontally. If you select a parent page or a group page, the system displays all
children pages in a tabstrip.

Vertical
The system displays links to the pages vertically. There is no hierarchy.

Tree (vertical with sub-levels)
The system displays links to the pages in a vertical tree with all its nodes expanded. The Tree navigation type enables you
to view the hierarchy of the website.

Sitemap divided in column
The system displays links to top level pages horizontally. If a top level page is a parent page or a group page, containing
other pages, they are displayed in a column below their parent page. Only the first two levels of hierarchy are displayed.

Sitemap divided in rows
The system displays links to top level pages vertically. If a top level page is a parent page or a group page, containing
other pages, they are displayed in a row below their parent page. Only the first two levels of hierarchy are displayed.

 Custom Navigation
Select this option to choose different than the predefined navigation types.

The Navigation window closes and the Navigation widget is configured to display the navigation links you have selected.


| Navigation widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

HORIZONTAL NAVIGATION
The system displays links to the pages horizontally (one next to the other). There is no hierarchy (no links to children pages).

In Fine tune the selected type area, select one of the following:

 Top level pages
The Navigation widget displays links to pages that are at top level in the structure of pages and have no parent.

 All pages under particular page
The system displays links to pages that are children of only one particular page.

1. To select the page, click Select page button.

2. In the treeview that appears, select the parent page and click Done selecting.

 Custom selection of pages…
The system displays links only to pages which you select.

1. To select pages for the navigation, click Select pages button.
The Select Pages window appears.

2. Select one of the following tabs:

 From this site
In the treeview that appears, select the checkboxes of the pages, which you want to be part of the navigation.

133

 From other sites
a. Enter the URL of the page.

b. In Name input field, enter the name to be displayed in the navigation.

c. Click Add button.
The page is added to the list of external pages.

You can add as many pages as needed. To remove a page, click the respective button.

3. When finished, click Done selecting.

NOTE: You can select both external pages and pages from Sitefinity.

 To apply a CSS, click Design settings.

 You can choose a class name for each navigation, if later you want to set a CSS for this particular navigation. Enter the
name in Wrapper CSS class input field.

 If you want to apply a template that is different from the predefined, enter the path to the template. You must have
uploaded the template in your project templates. For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Website
templates file structure.

| Configuring the Navigation widget | Navigation widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

HORIZONTAL NAVIGATION WITH DROPDOWN MENUS
The system displays links to the pages horizontally. If you select a parent page or a group page, the system displays all children
pages in a dropdown menu.


 Top level pages




 In Levels to include, select one of the following:

 All existing levels
When you select a parent or a group page, the system always displays its children pages.

 <Number> level(s)
The system displays the children pages only up to the level you have entered in the input field.
For example, if you have entered 2, the system displays only top level pages and their children.

 In Open dropdown menu on, select one of the following:

 Mouse over
The dropdown menu with children pages opens when you hover over the parent page.

 Click
The dropdown menu with children pages opens when you click the parent page.





134

HORIZONTAL NAVIGATION WITH TABS
The system displays links to the pages horizontally. If you select a parent page or a group page, the system displays all children
pages in a tabstrip.


 Top level pages







 In Open dropdown menu on, select one of the following:

 Mouse over
The dropdown menu with children pages opens when you hover over the parent page.

 Click
The dropdown menu with children pages opens when you click the parent page.





VERTICAL NAVIGATION
The system displays links to the pages vertically. There is no hierarchy.


 Top level pages




 Custom selection of pages…
The system displays links only to pages that you select.

1. To select pages for the navigation, click Select pages button.
The Select Pages window appears.

2. Select one of the following tabs:

 From this site
In the treeview that appears, select the checkboxes of the pages, which you want to be part of the navigation.

 From other sites

135

a. Enter the URL of the page.

b. In Name input field, enter the name to be displayed in the navigation.

c. Click Add button.
The page is added to the list of external pages.

You can add as many pages as needed. To remove a page, click the respective button.

3. When finished, click Done selecting.

NOTE: You can select both external pages and pages from Sitefinity.

 All sibling pages of currently opened page
The system displays links to all pages that are on the same level as the page that is opened.


 You can choose a class name for each navigation if later you want to set a CSS for this particular navigation. Enter the



TREE NAVIGATION
The system displays links to the pages in a vertical tree with all its nodes expanded. The Tree navigation type enables you to view
the hierarchy of the website.


 Top level pages







 Select the following checkboxes:

 Show all levels expanded initially
The system displays all levels of pages expanded. The parent pages cannot be collapsed.

 Allow collapsing
The system displays only top level pages. All pages that are parent pages can be expanded.

 Show all levels expanded initially and Allow collapsing
The system displays all pages expanded, but parent pages can be collapsed.


 You can choose a class name for each navigation if later you want to set a CSS for that particular navigation. Enter the


136


SITEMAP NAVIGATION DIVIDED IN COLUMN
The system displays links to top level pages horizontally. If a top level page is a parent page or a group page, containing other
pages, they are displayed in a column below their parent page. Only the first two levels of hierarchy are displayed.


 Top level pages








SITEMAP NAVIGATION DIVIDED IN ROWS
The system displays links to top level pages vertically. If a top level page is a parent page or a group page, containing other pages,
they are displayed in a row below their parent page. Only the first two levels of hierarchy are displayed.


 Top level pages








CONFIGURING THE ARCHIVE WIDGET
Use the Archive widget to display published content items grouped by date on your page.

EXAMPLE: You can display all the news created so far, grouped according to the year they were published. If you have news
published since 2008, then the Archive widget displays a list that contains the years 2008, 2009, and 2010. When you click a year,
the system displays the news published in this year.

To configure the Archive widget, perform the following:

1. Drag and drop the Archive widget on your page and perform one of the following:

To display an Procedure

137

archive of:

Blog posts a. Add the Blog posts widget to the page.

b. Click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the Archive widget.

c. In ContentType input field enter Telerik.Sitefinity.Blogs.Model.BlogPost.

Events a. Add the Events widget to the page.


c. In ContentType input field enter Telerik.Sitefinity.Events.Model.Event.

News a. Add the News widget to the page.


c. In ContentType input field enter Telerik.Sitefinity.News.Model.NewsItem.

Images a. Add the Image gallery widget to the page.


c. In ContentType input field enter Telerik.Sitefinity.Libraries.Model.Image.

Videos a. Add the Video gallery widget to the page.


c. In ContentType input field enter Telerik.Sitefinity.Libraries.Model.Video.

Documents a. Add the Download list widget to the page.


c. In ContentType input field enter Telerik.Sitefinity.Libraries.Model.Document.

For more information, see Displaying content using widgets.

2. In edit mode of the Archive widget, in DateBuildOptions input field, enter one of the following:

 YearMonthDay
Groups the content items according to the year, the month, and the date they were published.

 YearMonth
Groups the content items according to the year and the month they were published.

 Year
Groups the content items according to the year they were published.

3. In edit mode of the Archive widget, in ShowItemCount, enter one of the following:

 True
After the date the system displays in brackets the number of published items for this date.

 False
The system does not display the number of items for this date.

4. Click Save.
The system saves the setting and closes the editing mode of the Archive widget.



CONFIGURING THE LANGUAGE SELECTOR WIDGET
Use the Language selector widget if you use multiple languages for your website. The widget allows the user to switch between
the different language versions of a page.

PREREQUISITES: You are in multilingual mode. For more information, see Managing languages.

138

After you drag and drop the Language selector widget on your page you must configure it to display language links.

The Language selector window appears.

2. In the Display language selector as… radio button group, choose how to display the links to different languages, by selecting
one of the following:

 Horizontal list
Displays the language links one next to the other.

 Vertical list
Displays the language links one under another.

 Drop-down menu
Displays the language links in a dropdown box.

3. If you want the current language to be also included in the list of links, select the Include the current language in the selector
checkbox.

4. In What to do with languages without translations? radio button group, choose how the widget behaves when there is an
added language, for which the page has no translation.

 Hide the link to the missing translation
The system displays only links to existing translations.

 Redirect to home page of language for missing translation
The system displays links to all added languages, but for the languages for which there is no translation, the system
redirects to the homepage of the respective language.

For more information about language translations, see Create a language translation of a page.

The system saves the setting and closes the editing mode of the Language selector widget.



SCRIPTS AND STYLES WIDGETS GROUP
The Scripts and Styles widgets group contains widgets that you use to apply style to the page or to enhance the page with
additional functionality.

Section contents


CSS
Use the CSS widget to apply Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to your page. CSS are used to style your webpage in terms of font,
colors, spacing, etc.

JavaScript
Use Java Script widget to embed JavaScript code in your page. JavaScript is used to enhance the functionality of your website.

Google Analytics
Use this widget to add Google Analytics tracking code to your page. You use Google Analytics to track your website traffic and
marketing effectiveness.


CONFIGURING THE CSS WIDGET
Use the CSS widget to apply Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to your page. CSS are used to style your webpage in terms of font,
colors, spacing, etc.

To apply a CSS to your page, perform the following:

139

1. Drag and drop the CSS widget anywhere on the page and click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The CSS window appears.

NOTE: If you add CSS widget in a page template, the CSS file is applied to all the pages that use this template. If you add it
on one particular page, the CSS file is applied only to this page.

2. Add the CSS code in one of the following ways:

 If the CSS file (files with .css extension) you want to apply is already uploaded, on Link to a CSS file tab, perform one of
the following:

 In URL input field, enter the URL of an already uploaded CSS file.

 Click Select…button, browse the uploaded files to select the CSS file you want to apply, and click Done.

For more information about uploading files, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing files in
Sitefinity.
 If you want to add custom CSS code, on Write CSS tab, enter the CSS code in the textbox.

3. In Media radio button, select the media type for which the embedded CSS is intended.

 All
Includes all types of media

 Select media types…
A list of checkboxes appears.
For more information about different media types, see World Wide Web Consortium specifications  Media types  7.3
Recognized media types on http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS2/media.html.

The CSS window closes and the system embeds the link to the CSS file or the code you have written in the head tag of the
page.

| Scripts and Styles widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

CONFIGURING THE JAVA SCRIPT WIDGET
Use Java Script widget to embed JavaScript code in your page. JavaScript is used to enhance the functionality of your website. For
example, you can use JavaScript to validate user input.

To add a JavaScript code to your page, perform the following:

1. Drag and drop the Java Script widget on the page and click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Java Script window appears.

NOTE: If you add Java Script widget in a page template the JavaScript is applied to all the pages that use this template. If
you add it on one particular page, the JavaScript is applied only to this page.

2. Add the JavaScript code in one of the following ways:

 If the JavaScript file (files with .js extension) you want to apply is already uploaded, on Link to a Java Script file (.js) tab,

 In URL input field, enter the URL of an already uploaded JavaScript file.

 Click Select…button, browse the uploaded files to select the JavaScript file you want to apply, and click Done.

For more information about uploading files, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing Sitefinity files.

 If you want to add custom JavaScript code, on Write Java Script tab, enter the JavaScript code in the input field.

3. In Where to include in HTML? radio button, select one of the following.

 In the head tag
The JavaScript is executed immediately when a page starts to load.

 Where the widget is dropped
The JavaScript is executed when the widget is being loaded.

140

 Before the closing body tag
The JavaScript is executed at the end of the page’s loading process.
For example, this option is often used to embed page tracking code, such as Google Analytics, because if this code is
executed, it means that the user has not closed the page before the page has been fully loaded.

The Java Script window closes and the system embeds the link to the JavaScript file or the code you have written where you
have specified in Where to include in HTML radio button.


CONFIGURING THE GOOGLE ANALYTICS WIDGET
You use this widget to add Google Analytics tracking code to your page. You use Google Analytics to track your website traffic and
marketing effectiveness. The tracking code that you insert in Google Analytics widget helps Google Analytics to get information
about your website. For more information about Google Analytics, see www.google.com/analytics.

To gather data about your website traffic, perform the following:

1. Sign up in Google Analytics.

2. Register your website in Google Analytics.

3. Obtain a tracking code from Google Analytics.

For more information, see the Google Analytics  Getting Started Guide on
http://www.google.com/support/analytics/bin/static.py?hl=en&page=guide.cs&guide=19779.

4. Drag and drop Google Analytics widget anywhere on the page you want to track.

NOTE: If you add Google Analytics widget in a page template the tracking is applied to all the pages that use this template. If
you add it on one particular page, the tracking is available only for this page.

5. Click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Google Analytics window appears.

6. Paste the tracking code in the textbox.
You can find an example of the tracking code that you need to paste in Google Analytics widget on the Google Analytics Help
page, in section Adding the tracking code  Step 1 on
http://www.google.com/support/analytics/bin/answer.py?hl=en&answer=55488.

7. Click Save.
The Google Analytics window closes.

For more information, see Google Analytics Help on http://www.google.com/support/analytics/



LOGIN WIDGETS GROUP
The Login widgets group contains widgets that you use to provide your website users with the ability to login, to display the
currently logged user and login or logout links.

Section contents

The following widgets are part of the Login group:

Login
Using the Login widget, your website users will be able to login to your website. The widget displays a username and
password login fields and additional login options that you have configured.

Login name
Use the Login name widget to display the name of the currently logged user.

Login status
Use the Login status widget to display the login and logout links on your website.

141


CONFIGURING THE LOGIN WIDGET
Using the Login widget, your website users will be able to login to your website. The widget displays a username and password
login fields and additional login options that you have configured.

To setup login on your website, perform the following:

1. Drag and drop the Login widget on the page and click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The widget configuration opens in advanced mode.

2. If you want the login fields to disappear after a user logs in, in VisibleWhenLoggedIn input field, enter False.

3. If you want to have the login fields on a one page and to redirect the user to another page after the login, you must enter the
URL of this page in DestinationPageUrl input field.


The Edit window closes.

NOTE: The login fields cannot be displayed in page editing mode. To see a preview, exit the page editing mode and click Live site
link in the upper-right corner of the page.

| Login widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

CONFIGURING THE LOGIN NAME WIDGET
Use the Login name widget to display the name of the currently logged user.


1. Drag and drop the Login name widget on the page and click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.

2. By default the Login name widget displays the first and the last name of the user, who is currently logged in. You can change
that in FormatString input field.

NOTE: The widget displays the name of the user only when the user is logged in.



CONFIGURING THE LOGIN STATUS WIDGET
Use the Login status widget to display the login and logout links on your website.


1. Drag and drop the Login status widget in the page and click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.

By default the Login status widget displays a Log in link, when the user is not logged, and a Log out link, when the user is
logged in.

2. Depending on where you have dropped the Login status widget, perform one of the following:

 If you have the Login and the Login status widgets on different pages, you must enter the URL of the page, where the
Login widget is dropped, in LoginUrl input field. This way, when an unlogged user, clicks the Log in link, the Login page is
displayed.

 If you have the Login and Login status widgets on one page, to avoid displaying both the Log in link from the Login status
widget and the Login button from the Login widget, you can hide the Login status widget from users that are not logged
in. This way only the Log out link is displayed only to users that are logged in.
To do this, perform the following:

a. Click More in the upper-right corner of the Login status widget.

142

b. In the dropdown menu, click Permissions.

c. In View a widget section, click Change.

d. Under Advanced, select Explicitly deny this to selected roles and users... checkbox.

e. Click Add Roles or Users button.

f. Select Anonymous and click Done selecting.

3. By default, when the user clicks Log out, the page is refreshed. To redirect the user to another page, in LogoutAction input
field, enter Redirect and in LogoutUrl input field, enter the URL of the page where you want to send the user after a logout.



NOTE: The login status cannot be displayed in page editing mode. To see a preview, exit the page editing mode and click Live site
link in the upper-right corner of the page.


SEARCH WIDGETS GROUP
The Search widgets group contains widgets that you use to display a search box and search results on your website. You use the
Search and Search results widgets to provide the users of your website to search for content.
Section contents

The following widgets are part of the Search group:

Search
Use the Search widget to add and configure a search box to a page. After you have created one or more search indexes, you
use the Search widget to select indexes to be used for the search.

Search results
Use the Search results widget to configure where and how to display the results of a search that a user performed on your
website.


CONFIGURING SEARCH WIDGET
Use the Search widget to add and configure a search box to a page. After you have created one or more search indexes, you use
the Search widget to select indexes to be used for the search.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one search index. For more information, see Defining search indexes.

To configure the Search widget, perform the following:

1. After you have dragged and dropped the Search widget on your page, click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Search window appears.

2. In Where to search? dropdown box select the search index, which you want to use for this search box.
The list contains all created search indexes. For more information, see Defining search indexes.

The search index is a predefined set of search content. For example, you can create a search index that contains all news.
When a user enters a search word, it will be applied to all news items on your website.

3. In Where to display search results? you must select the page where the search results will be displayed.
You can select the same page, where the search box is located, or you can select a different page.

To select a page, perform the following:

a. Click Select a page… button.

b. Form the list of pages that appears, select a page and click Done selecting.
The page appears in Search window. If you want to change it, click Change… button.

IMPORTANT: The page, where you choose to display the search results, must have the Search results widget added to it.

143

4. Click Save.
The Search window closes and the Search widget is configured to display the search box.


| Search widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

CONFIGURING SEARCH RESULTS WIDGETS
Use the Search results widget to configure where and how to display the results of a search that a user performed on your
website.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one search index and have added the Search widget somewhere on your website.

To configure the Search results widget, perform the following:

1. After you have dragged and dropped the Search results widget on your page, click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the
widget.
The Search Results window appears.

2. Select one or both of the following:

 Show searchbox above the results
 Show searchbox below the results
If you display the search results on the same page as the search box (where you have dropped the Search widget), you do
not need to select any of the above, since the search box will be always displayed.

3. Under Template select the template which is used to display the news on the webpage.
clicking Edit.
The Search Results window closes and the Search results widget is configured to display the search results.


| Search widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

USERS WIDGETS GROUP
The Users widgets group contains widgets that you use to display lists of users, user registration form and provide the user with
the ability to change profile information, such as password or email.

Section contents

The following widgets are part of the Users group:

Profile
Use the Profile widget to provide the users of your website with the opportunity to view or change their profile information,
such as password or email.

Users list
Use the User list widget to display lists of users. You can display users of different profile types or different roles. For example
you can display only forum users and you can choose to display only their nicknames.

Registration
Use the Registration widget to provide the users of your website with the opportunity to register.

Account activation
Use this widget when the account of the user is not immediately activated, but must first be confirmed. You must add the
Account activation widget on the confirmation page.


144

CONFIGURING THE PROFILE WIDGET
Use the Profile widget to provide the users of your website with the opportunity to view or change their profile information, such as
password or email.

To configure the Profile widget, perform the following:

1. After you have dragged and dropped the Profile widget on your page, click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Profile window appears.

2. Under This profile is in… section, select the mode in which you want to display the user profile information.

Read mode only
Displays information about the user, which is read-only and cannot be edited.

Edit mode only
Displays information about the user, where all fields are editable.

Both: Read mode that can be edited
Displays information about the user, which is read-only. The information becomes editable, if the user clicks Edit Profile or
Change Password links.
The Profile window closes and the Profile widget is configured to display information about the user.


| Users widget group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

READ MODE
The system displays information about the user, which is read-only and cannot be edited.

In Fine tune the selected type, make the following settings:


 User logged to his/her account
The system displays information about the user that is currently logged in.

 Selected user
The system displays information of a user different than the user that is currently logged in.
To select the user whose details are displayed, perform the following:

a. Click Select a user button.
A list of all existing users appears.

b. Select the user and click Done selecting.

2. If you have more than one user profiles created, a dropdown box appears where you must select the profile which information
you want to display.
The system displays information only from the selected profile.

EXAMPLE: You have created profile type Forum, where in addition to the basic user information, there is a field Nickname
that each forum user completes. If in the dropdown you select Forum profile type, only the nickname of the user is displayed.

For more information about profile types, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing users, roles, and
permissions  Managing user profiles.
3. In Template, select the template that is used to display the user information on the webpage.
clicking Edit template.
NOTE: The Auto generated fields template displays all fields defined in the profile type and uses the settings that you defined
for each custom or default field in the settings of the profile type. These are the settings that you defined on the Appearance
tab of each field.
For more information about custom fields, see Adding custom fields to content items.

145

4. You can choose a class name for the Profile widget if later you want to set a CSS style for this particular widget.
To do this click More options and enter a name for the class in Css class input field.

| Configuring the Profile widget | Users widget group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

EDIT MODE
The system displays information about the user, where all fields are editable.

In Fine tune the selected type, make the following settings:



2. In Template, select the template that is used to display the user information on the webpage.
tab of each field.
3. Choose what to display when changing password.
Select one of the following radio buttons:

 Show message above the form
Select if you want to display a message to the user when password is successfully changed.
Enter the message in the text box.

 Open a specially prepared page...
Select if you want to display a page to the user when password is successfully changed.
Click Change page button, select the page and click Done selecting.

4. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the Profile widget if later you want to set a CSS style for this
particular widget.


READ MODE THAT CAN BE EDITED
The system displays information about the user, which is read-only. The information becomes editable if the user clicks Edit Profile
or Change Password links.



2. Choose templates for the following:

146

 ‘Read mode’ template
This is the template for the user information when the profile is in read-only mode.

 ‘Edit mode’ template
This is the template for the user information displayed after the user clicks Edit Profile.

 Template for not logged users
This is the template displayed to a user who attempts to change profile without being logged in.

 'Change password' template
This is the template displayed to a user who attempts to change password.

tab of each field.
3. Depending on whether you want the user to edit profile and change password on the same page or on new pages, perform
one of the following:

 If you want to edit profile information and change password on the same page, perform the following:

a. Choose templates for ‘Edit mode’ template and 'Change password' template.
These are the templates displayed after the user clicks Edit Profile or Change Password links.

b. Expand More actions and select what to display after changes have been saved.

 Stay in the same screen but display a message above the form...
In the text box, enter the message that is displayed when changes are saved.

Click Select a page button, from the tree select the page that opens when changes are saved, and click Done
selecting.
 If you want to edit profile information and change password on separate pages, select Open Edit and Change password
in selected existing pages... checkbox.
The ‘Edit mode’ template and 'Change password' template dropdown boxes disappear.

a. To select the page that is displayed when the user clicks Edit Profile link, under Page for editing profile, click Select a
page button, select a page from the tree, and click Done selecting.
b. To select the page that is displayed when the user clicks Change Password link, under Page for changing password,
click Select a page button, select a page from the tree, and click Done selecting.

4. You can choose a class name for the Profile widget if later you want to set a CSS style for this particular widget.
To do this click More options and enter a name for the class in Css class input field.


CONFIGURING THE USERS LIST WIDGET
Use the Users list widget to display lists of users. You can display users of different profile types or different roles. For example you
can display only forum users and you can choose to display only their nicknames.

After you drag and drop the Users list widget on your page, perform the following:

The User list window appears where you can configure the following:

USERS
On this tab, you can choose the users which you want to display in the list.

147

1. In Which users to display? dropdown box, select the profile type of the users which you want to display.
For example you can display only forum users.

2. Select which users you want to display in the list, by choosing one of the following radio buttons:

 All registered users
 One user only
Click Select a user… button, select the user which you want to display, and click Done selecting.

 Users by roles...
Click Select roles… button, select one or more roles, and click Done selecting.
Only users belonging to the selected roles will be displayed in the list.

LIST SETTINGS
On this tab you choose how to display the users you have selected.

 If you select Use paging radio button, the system divides the users into pages.
In the input field you specify how many users per page you want to display.

 If you select Use limit radio button, the system displays only a limited number of the users you have chosen to display.
In the input field, you specify how many posts you want to display.

 If you select No limit and paging radio button, the system displays all the users that you have selected in Users tab.

 In Sort users by dropdown box, select a sorting criterion for the users.

 In List template, select the template which is used to display the users on the webpage.
clicking Edit.

On this tab you choose the way to display a user when clicked.
In Open Single user profile in… radio button, select one of the following:

When a user is clicked, the information is displayed in a page which is automatically generated and has the same layout as the
current page.

You select a page from the existing pages with certain layout where the user will be displayed when clicked.

NOTE: In order to display the user, the page you have selected must have the Users list widget added.

From the treeview, select the page where you want to display the user.


 In Detail templates, select the template which is used to display the users on the webpage.
clicking Edit.
tab of each field.
The User list window closes and the Users list widget is configured to display the users you have selected.

148




CONFIGURING THE REGISTRATION WIDGET
Use the Registration widget to provide the users of your website with the opportunity to register.

After you drag and drop the Registration widget on your page, perform the following:

The Registration window appears where you can configure the following:

GENERAL

1. In Provider, which the user will be registered in... dropdown box, select where to register the user that is filling out the
registration form.
You can choose between Public users and Backend users.

2. In Roles, which the user will be assigned to… choose whether the user is assigned to any roles.
Click Select roles... button, select the roles to which you want to assign the user and click Done selecting.

For more information about roles, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing users, roles, and permission
 Managing roles.

3. In Registration form template dropdown, choose the template for the registration form.
4. In When the form is successfully submitted... choose what to display after the registration form have been completed by the
user.

 Show a message
In the text box, enter the message that is displayed when form is submitted.

Click Select a page button, from the tree select the page that opens when registration is complete, and click Done
selecting.
5. In CSS class input field, you can choose a class name for the Registration widget if later you want to set a CSS style for this
particular widget.

ACCOUNT ACTIVATION

1. Choose when to activate the account of the user who completed the registration form.

 Immediately
The account is activated when the user clicks Register button in the registration form.

 After a confirmation
a. Under Confirmation page, select the page that opens when the user clicks the confirmation link in the email.

b. Click Select a page… button, select the page from the tree, and click Done selecting.

c. Select a template for the email that the system sends to the user for account confirmation.
You can create a custom template by clicking Create New Template. You can edit existing templates by selecting
them and clicking Edit template.
For more information, see Sitefinity Designer’s Guide  Using widget templates  Using the Widget templates editor
 Creating and editing widget templates.

149

2. If, after the user account has been activated, you want to send a confirmation email, select Send an email for successful
registration checkbox.
In 'Success' email template, select the template for the email that the system sends to the user when the account has been
successfully activated.
The Registration window closes and the Registration widget is configured to display the users you have selected.



CONFIGURING THE ACCOUNT ACTIVATION WIDGET
Use this widget when the account of the user is not immediately activated, but must first be confirmed. You must add the Account
activation widget on the confirmation page. The confirmation page can be the same page, where the Registration widget is added
or another page.

PREREQUISITES: When configuring the Registration widget, on Account activation tab you must have selected After a
confirmation radio button. For more information, see Configuring the Registration widget.
To configure the Account activation widget, perform the following:

1. Drag and drop the widget on the same page that you have chosen in Registration widget, on Account activation tab, after you
have selected After a confirmation radio button.

2. Click the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the Account activation widget.
The advanced configuration mode appears.

3. In SuccessMessage input field, enter a message that will be displayed to the user after the registration is confirmed and the
account is activated.

4. Click Save.
The advanced configuration mode of the widget closed



CLASSIFICATIONS WIDGETS GROUP
The Classifications widgets group contains widgets that you use to display lists of categories and tags on your website. You use the
categories and the tags to filter the content of the pages.

Section contents


Categories
Use the Categories widget to filter the content of a page. You use the widget together with another widget from the Content
widgets group, such as News or Events widgets. When the user clicks a category, the news or events are filtered according to
this category.

Tags
Use the Tags widget to filter the content of a page. You use the widget together with another widget from the Content
widgets group, such as News or Events widgets. When the user clicks a tag, the news or events are filtered according to this
tag.


150

CONFIGURING THE CATEGORIES WIDGET
Use the Categories widget to display categories on your page. The categories are then used to filter content. By clicking different
categories from the treeview displayed on the webpage, you can filter the content of the page. By using hierarchy of categories,
you can filter content items according to more general or more specific criterion.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least two categories.

For more information about when and how to use categories, see Using categories.

To configure the Categories widget, perform the following:

1. After you have dragged and dropped the Categories widget on your page, click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the
widget.
The Edit window appears in advanced mode.

2. In BaseUrl input field enter the URL name of the page which content you want to filter using categories.
This page can be either the same page on which the Categories widget is, or it can also be another page.
For example, you can display the categories on one page of your website, but if the user clicks a category, the system opens
another page and filters its content.

NOTE: You enter the URL name in the following format ~/<URL name of page>. For example, if the title of the page is
About us, the automatically generated URL name is about-us (in case you have not changed it), then in BaseUrl input field you
enter ~/about-us.
You can find out the URL name of a page in the address bar of the browser, when a page is opened in content editing mode.
The URL name is the name after the name of the project (http://…/<project name>/<page-name>/…) or you can see the
URL name in the properties of the page. For more information, see Editing the properties of a page.

3. Click Save.
The system saves the setting and closes the editing mode of the widget.
Categories are displayed in a treeview if they have hierarchy or in vertical list if they have no hierarchy.

For more information about creating categories, see Creating a category.
For more information about how to add a category to a content item, see Adding categories and tags to a content item.

For more information about configuring other properties, see Advanced configuration of widgets.

| Classifications widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

CONFIGURING THE TAGS WIDGET
Use the Tags widget to display tags on your page. The tags are then used to filter content. By clicking different tags from the list of
tags displayed on the webpage, the user can filter the content on the page.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least two tags.

For more information about when and how to use tags, see Using tags.

To configure the Tags widget, perform the following:

1. After you have dragged and dropped the Tags widget on your page, click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Edit window appears in advanced mode.

2. In BaseUrl input field enter the URL name of the page which content you want to filter using tags.
This page can be either the same page on which the Tags widget is, or it can also be another page.
For example, you can display the tags on one page of your website, but if the user clicks a tag, the system opens another
page and filters its content.

NOTE: You enter the URL name in the following format ~/<URL name of page>. For example, if the title of the page is
About us, the automatically generated URL name is about-us (in case you have not changed it), then in BaseUrl input field you
enter ~/about-us.
You can find out the URL name of a page in the address bar of the browser, when a page is opened in content editing mode.
The URL name is the name after the name of the project (http://…/project name/page-name/…) or you can see the URL name
in the properties of the page. For more information, see Editing the properties of a page.

3. Click Save.
The system saves the setting and closes the editing mode of the widget. Tags are displayed in a list. The more items are
tagged with a particular tag, the bigger font is the system using to display this tag.

151

For more information about creating tags, see Creating a tag.
For more information about how to tag a content item, see Adding categories and tags to a content item.

For more information about configuring other properties, see Advanced configuration of widgets.

| Classifications widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

NEWSLETTERS WIDGETS GROUP
The Newsletters widgets group contains widgets that you use to display subscription and unsubscription forms to the visitors of
your website.

Section contents

The following widgets are part of the Newsletters group:

Subscribe form
Use the Subscribe form widget to allow the visitors of your website to subscribe to your newsletter.

Unsubscribe form
Use the Unsubscribe form widget to allow the visitors of your website to unsubscribe from the newsletter that they have been
subscribed to.


CONFIGURING THE SUBSCRIBE FORM WIDGET
Use this widget to display to the visitors of your website a form for subscribing to a newsletter.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one mailing list to which to add the new subscriber. For more information, see
Creating a mailing list.

After you drag and drop the Subscribe form widget on your page you must configure it to display the subscription form.

The Subscribe form window appears where you can configure the following:

1. Select a mailing list, to which the new subscriber will be added.

2. In Widget title input field, enter what will be displayed above the names and email fields of the form.
For example, enter Want to know more about are latest products? or Subscribe to our newsletter.

3. In Widget description textbox, enter, if needed, explanatory text or a description of the newsletter.
The text is displayed under the Widget title.
For example, enter Keep up with the latest products, upgrades and financing options...

4. When you are finished with all the settings, click Save.
The Subscribe form window closes and the widget is configured to display the subscription form.


| Newsletters widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

CONFIGURING THE UNSUBSCRIBE FORM WIDGET
Use this widget to display to the visitors of your website a form for unsubscribing from a newsletter, which they have been
subscribed to.

PREREQUISITES: You have created at least one mailing list to which visitors can subscribe and unsubscribe. For more
information, see Creating a mailing list.

After you drag and drop the Unsubscribe form widget on your page you must configure it to display the unsubscription form.

The Unsubscribe form window appears where you can configure the following:

1. Select a mailing list, from which the subscriber will be removed.

2. In Widget title input field, enter what will be displayed above the email fields of the form.

152

For example, enter want to unsubscribe from the monthly newsletter?.

3. In Widget description textbox, enter, if needed, explanatory text or a description of the form.
The text is displayed under the Widget title.
For example, enter If you don't want to receive our newsletter anymore, enter your email and we
will send you a link to unsubscribe.

4. When you are finished with all the settings, click Save.
The Unsubscribe form window closes and the widget is configured to display the form.


| Newsletters widgets group | Displaying content using widgets | Table of contents |

ADVANCED CONFIGURATION OF WIDGETS
You use this mode to configure individual properties of the widget.

PREREQUISITE: To edit properties of a widget in advanced mode, you must be an advanced user or a developer.

OPENING ADVANCED MODE
1. To open Advanced configuration mode, click Edit button in the upper-right corner of the widget.
The Simple configuration mode appears.

NOTE: Widgets that do not have simple configuration mode, are opened for editing directly in advanced mode.
In this case, skip Step 2 and Step 3.
For more information, see Widgets configuration modes reference.

2. Click Advanced button in the lower-right corner of the window.
The edit window appears in advanced mode, where all the properties of the widget are listed.
The following screenshot shows the Advanced configuration mode of the News widget:

3. To go back to simple mode, click Simple button.

DISPLAY OF PROPERTIES
You can switch between the following views:

 with the quick info text Alphabetically.
The system displays the properties in alphabetic order.

 with the quick info text Categorized.
The system displays the properties in categories. You can expand and collapse each category individually by clicking it or you
can expand and collapse all categories at once by clicking Expand all or Collapse all links respectively.

153

EDITING PROPERTIES

For more information about what each property means and what to enter in the input fields, see CompositeControl Properties (
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.web.ui.webcontrols.compositecontrol_properties.aspx) on Microsoft Developer
Network.


WIDGETS CONFIGURATION MODES REFERENCE
The following table shows a list of widgets and their configuration modes. If a widget has a simple configuration mode, it is
displayed by default when the widget is opened for editing:

Widget Simple mode Advanced mode

Archive No Yes

Account activation No Yes

Blog posts Yes Yes

Categories No Yes

Content block Yes Yes

CSS Yes No

Data No Yes

Document link Yes Yes

Download list Yes Yes

Events Yes Yes

Feed Yes Yes

Form Yes No

Google Analytics Yes Yes

Image Yes Yes

Image gallery Yes Yes

Java Script Yes No

Language selector Yes Yes

Navigation Yes No

List items Yes Yes

Login No Yes

Login name No Yes

Login status No Yes

News Yes Yes

Profile Yes Yes

RadControls No Yes

154

Registration Yes Yes

Search Yes No

Search results Yes Yes

Subscribe form Yes Yes

Tags No Yes

Video Yes Yes

Video gallery Yes Yes

Unsubscribe form Yes Yes

Users list Yes Yes


WORKING WITH SITEFINITY ANALYTICS MODULE
You use Sitefinity Analytics module to track your website traffic and marketing effectiveness. The module consists from various
reports and indicators that give you statistics for the visits and the visitors of your website, the way they reach it and use it, and
more.

To open Analytics, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Analytics.
If you have not set up Analytics, the initial setup page appears. Once you have setup Analytics, the system displays the Analytics
Dashboard.
PREREQUISITES: To use the Analytics module you must have completed the following:

 To perform the initial setup of Analytics, you must have registered your website in Google Analytics.
For more information about Google Analytics, see www.google.com/analytics.

 To see data in the Analytics module, you must have added and configured the Google Analytics widget. To use the Analytics
module, you must have added the Google Analytics widget to at least one of your website pages, so that information can be
collected.

Section contents

Setting up Analytics
Use this section if you have not used the Analytics module before and it is not configured. The window opens automatically
the first time you click Analytics.

Filtering, displaying, and grouping data
Use this section to learn how to set different time intervals, how to group data, what types of charts are available to you, and
how to navigate between different reports.

Using the Analytics map
The Analytics map is a geographic map of the world that depicts your website visits and other indicators, such as use of
mobile devices to access your website. The data is displayed per countries, per regions, and per cities.

Understanding the Dashboard
The Dashboard is the entry point to the Analytics module. You use it to view the most important indicators for your website
traffic, together with overviews of the main reports.

Information about website visitors
Use this section to view various statistics for the visitors of your website, such as number of visitors, time they spent on your
website, pages they visited, and more.

Technical information about the visitors
Use this section to view various statistics about the browsers and networks your visitors use, their screen resolutions,
operating systems, and more.

Information about website traffic sources

155

Use this section to view various statistics about the sources of traffic to your website, such as direct traffic, referring traffic, or
search engine traffic, and details about what generates the different types of traffic.

Information about the visited content
Use this section to view various statistics about what content do visitors of your website view, like the most visited pages, the
most frequent starting pages, and more.

Information about the website internal search
Use this section to view various statistics about your internal site search (the search box on your website), how often the
search functionality is used, which are the most commonly used search terms, and more.

Customizing Analytics
Use this section select different Google Analytics account, to select which reports each user is allowed to see, and determine
the administrators of the Analytics module.

Index of Analytics reports
Use this section as a reference. It contains a complete list of all reports in Sitefinity Analytics and links to information about
each report.

EXPORTING DATA
You can exports all the data gathered for your website to backup it and further analyze it. The Analytics module exports data in an
Excel XML file. You can export data from every table that is in the reports.

To export data from a table, perform the following:

1. Click the Export button in the upper-right corner of the table.

2. Select a name for the file and choose a location where to save it.

3. Click Save.
The system saves the file with extension .xml.


SETTING UP ANALYTICS
When you open the Analytics module for the first time, you need to configure it to show data for the site you want.

If you have not used the Analytics module before, the First-Time Setup and Configuration window appears. To setup Analytics,
perform the following:

1. Select the users who will have the permissions to administer Analytics and click Next step.
The system displays a list of all created users.
For more information about granting users with permissions to view reports in Analytics, see Customizing Analytics 
Changing permissions.
For more information, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing users, roles, and permissions 
Managing users.
2. In Enter Your Google Analytics Information, enter your Google Analytics user name and password.
If you do not have Google Analytics registration and have not added Google Analytics widget to at least one page of your
website, click Sign-up for Google Analytics link in the bottom of the window and perform procedure Configuring the Google
Analytics widget.

3. Click Get Analytics Accounts.
A dropdown box with all available accounts appears in Available Accounts dropdown box.

NOTE: You can have more than one account (website) associated with your username.

4. Select the desired account and click Save Settings.


 If you have already acquired your Google Analytics tracking code and have entered it in Google Analytics widget, click
Next step  Go to Analytics.
The Analytics Dashboard appears.

 If you have not yet added and configured the Google Analytics widget, click Copy in clipboard.

156

The tracking code is on your clipboard and you must perform procedure Configuring the Google Analytics widget  Step 4
to Step 7.
The next time you open Analytics, the Analytics Dashboard appears.

| Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

FILTERING, DISPLAYING, AND GROUPING DATA
Sitefinity analytics module has many functions that allow you to organize, display, and filter data so that you are able to spot
trends and patterns easily and conduct a more meaningful analysis.

Selecting the time interval
Use this section to select the time interval for which to display data.

Grouping of data
In Analytics you can group the data on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. Use this section to see how to change grouping.

Types of charts
Use this section to see what kind of charts you can use to better analyze your data.

Navigating Analytics
Use this section to learn how to navigate between different reports.

Using the Analytics map
The Analytics map is a geographic map of the world that depicts your website visits or other indicators per countries, regions,
and cities. Use it to analyze the distribution of data around the globe and to localize the geographic areas that generate most
of your website traffic.


SELECTING THE TIME INTERVAL
You can choose the time interval for which to display data.

1. To do this, click the time interval in the upper-right corner of the screen.
The system displays the following selection pane:

2. Click one of the predefined time intervals or define a custom date range and click Set Dates.
The selection pane closes and system displays the new data.

NOTE: You can change the time interval of the displayed data at any moment on every report you are viewing.

| Filtering, displaying, and grouping data | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

GROUPING OF DATA
In Analytics you can group the data on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. The grouping is applied to all indicators. Usually monthly
grouping is more meaningful for longer time intervals, such as a year or two, while daily grouping is suitable for short interval, for
example, 7 days.

You can change the grouping at any time by clicking one of the following in the Group by: button group:

 To display data on a daily basis, click with the quick info text Day.
The data is summed for every day and every day is represented by a point in the chart.

The screenshot below displays data for the time interval of 17th October until 15th November, grouped on daily basis:

157

 To display data on a weekly basis, click with the quick info text Week.
The data is summed for every week and every week is represented by a point in the chart.

The screenshot below displays data for the time interval of 1th August until 31th October, grouped on weekly basis:

NOTE: If as the first day of the time interval, you have selected a day that is not the begging of the week, the system
automatically calculates which the first day of that week is and the data, displayed in the chart, starts from that day. All other
data also starts to be calculated from that day. If as the last day of the time interval you have selected a day that is not the
end of the week, the system automatically calculates which the last day of the previous week is and the data, displayed in the
chart, ends at that day. All other data also stops to be calculated at that day.

 To display data on a daily basis, click with the quick info text Month.
The data is summed for every month and every month is represented by a point in the chart.

The screenshot below displays data for the time interval of 1th January until 1th November, grouped on monthly basis:

NOTE: If as the first day of the time interval, you have selected a day that is not the begging of the month, the system
automatically retrieves data for the entire month and the data, displayed in the chart, starts from the first day of the month.
All other data also starts to be calculated from the day of that month. If as the last day of the time interval you have selected
a day that is not the end of the month, the system automatically calculates which the last day of the previous month is and
the data, displayed in the chart, ends at that day. All other data also stops to be calculated at that day.


TYPES OF CHARTS
Analytics uses different types of charts to represent data. Single data series are represented by area charts and multiple series are
represented by stacked area charts. You can also change the view of the charts. Pie charts are used to depict data from tables.

ONE DIMENSIONAL AREA CHART
Analytics uses the area chart to represent a single time series. The screenshot bellow displays the Visits of your website grouped
on a daily basis:

158

NOTE: When you hover over a point in an area chart, the system displays the value of the indicator for the day, week, or month
which you have hovered over.

MULTIDIMENSIONAL STACKED AREA CHART
Analytics uses stacked area charts to represent graphically the proportion between different time series. At each point from the
time interval, you are able to see both the cumulative value (the upper most point in the chart for that day) as well as the
proportion with which each time series contribute.
The stacked area chart displays the five series that have the biggest total sum for the time interval you have selected. All other
series are summed together and represented as Other. Note that Other is always displayed at the bottom of a stacked area chart.

The following screenshot displays a stacked area chart, plotting the number of visits of users that use a particular screen
resolution. The five most commonly used resolutions are plotted, while all the other data is summed and represented by others.
Note that for each day, the sum of all time series (the upper most point) add up to the total number of visitors (represented in the
previous screenshot):

MULTIDIMENSIONAL LINE CHART
The line chart is not a cumulative (stacked) chart. Each timer series is represented by its own line. The line chart is better if you
want to spot a time trend, but, unlike the stacked area chart, seeing the proportion of the series is not that straight forward.

To switch between area chart and line chart, use the Views: button group in the toolbar:

 To display data in area charts, click with the quick info text Area Graph.

 To display data in line charts, click with the quick info text Line Graph.

The following screenshot represents the same data for screen resolutions as above, but in a line chart:

NOTE: When you hover over a time series in a stack area chart or a line chart, the system displays the name of the series and its
value for the day, week, or month which you have hovered over.

PIE CHART

159

The pie chart is used to graphically depict data from tables. It is used to represent only the proportion between the series. The pie
chart does not depict data in time, it uses total sums of all series for the chosen time interval.

The following screenshot represents the screen resolutions in a pie chart:

NOTE: When you hover over a sector in the chart, the system displays as quick info text the name of the series and its total count
for the selected time interval.

OVERVIEW CHART
Analytics uses overview charts for indicators, displayed in main reports. The overview charts are always small area charts, which
display no details. One of the indictors is displayed in the main chart and you can see the overview chart next to the other
indicators. When you click an overview chart, it is displayed in the main chart.

The following screenshot displays the overview chart of the Pageviews indicator:


NAVIGATING ANALYTICS
The navigation is located in the left side of the Analytics screen. It displays all the available reports, organized in a tree structure.
The starting screen is the Dashboard, followed by the main reports (Visitors, Traffic Sources, Content). The main reports give you
the most important information and contain overview and links to some of the detailed reports.

When you expand a main report, the system displays a list of all detailed reports:

If you are already familiar with all the reports, you can use the dropdown box above the navigation tree to directly select reports.
The dropdown box contains a list of all available reports.

160

Not all reports are represented in the navigation pane. Detailed reports, such as the report for the number of visits from users
using 1280x800 screen resolution, can only be accesses via another report. To get back to the previously viewed report, use the
back link above the name of the report. The link always takes you to the previous report which you have viewed.


USING THE ANALYTICS MAP
The Analytics map is a geographic map of the world that depicts your website visits and other indicators, such as use of mobile
devices to access your website. The data is displayed per countries, per regions, and per cities. Use it to analyze the distribution of
data around the globe and to localize the geographic areas that generate most of your website traffic.

You can display a geographic distribution of every report in Analytics. The data displayed in the main chart of the report can also
be displayed on the map of the world.

1. To view the Analytics map, open the desired report and in the upper-right corner, click Map button.

NOTE: A geographic map can display only one dimensional reports – for each country, region, or city, the system can display
the value of the chosen indicator. Therefore, you cannon display a stacked area chart on a map. In this case, when you click
Map, the system displays only the cumulative values. For example, if you open the New vs returning visitors report an click
Map, the system displays the geographic distribution of all visitors. If you open the detailed report of new visitors only and
then click Map, the system displays the geographic distribution of new visitors.

The map of the world appears.

For all countries, which have generated data for the indicator displayed in the main chart, the system displays a square like
this one . The color of the square varies depending on the contribution of each country. The system calculates the
percentage contribution of each country and displays squares from light green to dark blue, meaning lower and higher
percentage, respectively.

2. To zoom in and out use the scroll button of your mouse or use the use the buttons in the lower part of the map. To pane the
map, use your mouse.

3. To displays the name of the country and the value of the indicator this country for the selected time interval, hover over the
square.
The following is an example of hovering over the small square of USA:

 You can open the detail report for this country, by clicking with the quick info text View Detailed Report.
The system opens the respective country, region, or city detailed report containing an area chart of the number of visits
from this country, region, or city only, together with the values of the main indicators for this country.

 You can zoom in and out of the current level, using the buttons in the upper-right corner.
For example, if you are viewing data on regional level, you can zoom in city level or zoom out to country level.

The following screenshot displays European and Asian visits, using DSL connection, for the selected time interval on country
level, where Iran is contributing with 6 visits:

161

NOTE: For countries, from which there are no visits of your website for the chosen indicator for the selected time interval, the
system does not display a square.

4. To further analyze the geographical distribution of the visits, zoom the map until you see a more detailed regional view.
For each region that has generated visits, the system displays a square.

5. To displays the name of the region and the number of visits from this region for the selected time interval, hover over the
square.

The following screenshot displays visits from the United States, where each square represents a state. In this case North
Carolina is contributing with 2 visits:

NOTE: For regions, from which there are no visits of your website for the selected time interval, the system does not display a
square.

6. To further analyze the geographical distribution of the visits, zoom the map until you see a more detailed city view.
For each city that has generated visits, the system displays a square.

7. To displays the name of the city and the number of visits from this city for the selected time interval, hover over the square.

The following screenshot displays visits from San Francisco region on city level, where the city of Fremont is contributing with
1 visit:

162

NOTE: For cities, from which there are no visits of your website for the chosen indicator for the selected time interval, the
system does not display a blue square.

8. To display back the region and country level statistics, zoom out the map.


UNDERSTANDING THE DASHBOARD
To open Analytics, in the main menu in the upper part of the screen, click Analytics.
Once you have setup Analytics, the Analytics Dashboard appears.

The Dashboard is the entry point to the Analytics module. You use it to view the most important indicators for your website traffic,
together with overviews of the main reports.

If you have setup Analytics correctly and there is data gathered for your website, the displayed data must look similar to the
following screenshot:

163

The screenshot above displays data grouped on daily basis.

Section contents

 Main chart
In this area the system plots an indicator's values against time.

You can display other indicators by clicking them in the Main indicators section or by selecting them from the dropdown menu
next to the title of the main chart.
By default the system displays the Visits indicator.

When you hover over a specific point in the chart, the system displays the exact value of the indicator in this specific day,
week, and month.

NOTE: For each indicator, you can see a distribution across the map of the world. When you click Map in the upper-right
corner of the page, the system displays the values of the indicator for each country, region, and city.

Main indicators
Following the main chart, is section Site usage. You use this section to view key indicators for your website.
For each indicator the system displays an overview chart next to the indicator.
You can view a detailed chart by clicking the indicator's overview chart. The system displays the values in the main chart of
the Dashboard.

For example, if you click the overview chart of Bounce rate indicator, the detailed chart of the indicator is displayed in the
main chart of the Dashboard.

To display the detailed page of each indicator, you must click the indicator itself. The system opens the indicator's detailed
report, which contains the detailed chart for the chosen time interval together with a bar chart displaying absolute and relative
values for each day, week, or month. The detailed reports for the main indicators are located under Visitors  Visitors
trending.
For more information, see Visitors detailed reports.

Overviews of main reports
Below the Site usage section the system displays the overviews of the following main reports:

 Visitors

 Traffic sources

164

 Content

From each overview report you can navigate to the detailed report by clicking view report link. You can also navigate to these
reports using the Navigation section.


MAIN INDICATORS
In the Site usage section of the Analytics Dashboard the system displays the main indicators together with their overview charts.
The meaning of each indicator is described in the following table:

Indicator Description

Visits The visits of your website are the number of individual sessions initiated.

 If a visitor initiates more than one session in a 30 min time interval, all the sessions are counted as one
session.

 If a user is inactive for 30 min or more and then resumes its session, it is counted as a new visit.

Pageviews The pageview is the view of one page from the website. If the user navigates away from the page and then
returns to it or reloads it, the system counts an additional pageview.

Average pages per This is a calculated indicator of the number of pages visited during one session. It is calculated by dividing
visit the pageviews by the visits.

Bounce rate This is the percentage of visits in which the visitors of your website exited the site from the same page from
which they entered (landed). A high bounce rate can mean that the content of the landing pages is
irrelevant or unusable to the visitors.

You cannot use this indicator if you only have one page in your website or if you have most of your content
on your landing page. In those cases you will get a high bounce rate.

Average time on The average time on site is calculated by dividing the total time on the website for all visits by total number
site of visits.

New visits rate This is the percentage of visits by people that have never been on the website.

| Understanding the Dashboard | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

OVERVIEW OF MAIN REPORTS
In addition to the Site usage section, the Dashboard displays overviews of the main reports (Visitors, Traffic sources, and Content)
in the forms of charts and tables:

Overview of main Description
report

Visitors overview The system displays a detailed area chart of the visits for the chosen time interval.

To display more details, you must open the Visitors report by clicking the chart or the view full report link
below the chart or selecting Visitors from the navigation in the left side of the page.

Traffic sources The system displays a pie chart representing the contribution of each source to the traffic of your website.
overview
This is a qualitative indicator that shows how people reach your site, for example, through search engines,
through another site that is referring yours, by entering your URL directly, or in another way.

To display more details, you must open the Traffic sources report by clicking the view full report link below
the chart or selecting Traffic sources from the navigation in the left side of the page.

NOTE: To display details about each specific traffic source from the pie chart, click its sector. The system
opens the detailed report for that specific traffic source. For more information, see Traffic sources detailed

165

reports.

Content overview The system displays a table containing the most visited pages of your website, together with the number of
visits of each page and their proportion from the total.

To display more details, you must open the Content report by clicking the view full report link below the
table or selecting Content from the navigation in the left side of the page.

NOTE: To display details about each specific page from the table, click the page. The system opens a report
containing an area chart of the visits of this specific page, together with the values of the main indicators for
this page only.

| Understanding the Dashboard | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

INFORMATION ABOUT WEBSITE VISITORS
In the Visitors section you can view various statistics for the visitors of your website. The section contains one main report and
various detailed reports located under the main report.

The following is a screenshot of the navigation on the left side of the screen and displays the structure of the information about
visitors:

Section contents

Visitors main report
You open the visitor main report by clicking Visitors in the left side of the page.
The system displays the Visitors overview page.

Visitors detailed reports
To access all the information related to the visitors of your website, expand the Visitors node.
The system displays a list of reports containing details about the visitors of your website.


VISITORS MAIN REPORT
The Visitors overview page, displays the Visitors main report, which contains the most important information, indicators, and
overview reports about the visitors of your website. The Visitors overview page is the entry point when you are browsing
information about visitors and visits.

The following screenshot is an example of the Visitors main report with data grouped on daily basis:

166

Section contents

The report displays the following sections:

Main chart and Visitors indicators
Use this section to view key indicators for the visitors of your website and to plot the indicators’ values against time or view
their values distributed over the map of the world.

Overview of Visitors reports
Use this section for an overview of reports that contain details about the visitors.

| Information about website visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

MAIN CHART AND VISITORS INDICATORS
MAIN CHART
In this area the system plots an indicator's values against time in an area chart.

 You can display different Visitors indicators by clicking them in the Visitors detail section or by selecting them from the
dropdown menu next to the title of the main chart.
By default the system displays an area chart of the Visits indicator.

 You can also change the time interval for which the system displays data using the time interval section and the grouping of
data using the data grouping buttons.

When you hover over a specific point in the chart, the system displays the exact value of the indicator in this specific day, week, or
month.

NOTE: For each indicator, you can see a distribution across the map of the world. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of
the page, the system displays the values of the indicator for each country, region, and city.

VISITORS INDICATORS
Following the main chart, is section Visitors detail. You use this section to view key indicators for the visits of your website.

In addition to the indicators described in Main indicators, the Visitors overview page displays the number of Visitors.

The Visitors indicator is calculated in the following way: during the selected time interval, a user is counted as one visitor
regardless of how many session that user has during the time interval.


167

You can view a detailed chart by clicking the indicator's overview chart. The system displays the values in the main chart of the
Visitors overview page.
For example, if you click the overview chart of Bounce rate indicator, the detailed chart of the indicator is displayed in the main
chart of the Visitors overview page.

To display the detailed page of each indicator, you must click the indicator itself. The system opens the indicator's detailed report,
which contains the area chart for the chosen time interval together with a bar chart displaying absolute and relative values for each
day, week, and month. The detailed reports for the indicators are located under Visitors  Visitors trending.

For more information, see Visitors detailed reports.

| Visitors main report | Information about website visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

OVERVIEW OF VISITORS REPORTS
In addition to the above indicators the Visitors main report contains also the following tables, containing technical details about the
users:

Overview report Description

Top web browsers The table contains the web browsers that are most commonly used to access your website, ranked
according to number of visitors using the browsers.

To display more details, you must open the Browser report by clicking the view full report link below the
table or by expanding Visitors from the navigation in the left side of the page and clicking Devices 
Browsers.
NOTE: To display details about each specific browser from the table, click the browser. The system opens a
report containing the following details about the browser:

 A stacked area chart displaying the visits with this specific browser only.

NOTE: When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page, you can see a distribution of the
visits with that browser only across the map of the world.

 The values of the main indicators for this browser only.

 A table containing the versions of the web browser that are most commonly used to access your
website, ranked according to number of visits and their proportion.

 A pie chart depicting the data from the table.

Top connection The table contains the connection types that are most commonly used to access your website, ranked
types according to number of visitor.

To display more details, you must open the Connection speeds report by clicking the view full report link
below the table or by expanding Visitors from the navigation in the left side of the page and clicking
Network properties  Connection speeds.
NOTE: To display details about each specific connection type from the table, click the connection type. The
system opens a report containing area chart of the visits with this specific connection type and the values of
the main indicators for this connection types only. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page,
you can see a distribution of the visits with that connection type only across the map of the world.

For more information, see Technical information about the visitors.

| Visitors main report | Information about website visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

VISITORS DETAILED REPORTS
To access all the information related to the visitors of your website, expand the Visitors node.

The system displays a list of reports containing details about the visitors of your website:

Report Description

168

New vs Returning The New vs returning visitors page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits of new and returning visitors.

NOTE: When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page, you can see a distribution of all visits
across the map of the world.

 The values of the Visitors indicators.

 New vs returning visitor details table, containing the number and the proportion of new and returning
visitors.

 A pie chart representing the contribution of each type of visitor.

NOTE: To display details about each specific type of visitor from the table, click the type of visitor. The
system opens a report containing an area chart of this type of visitors, together with the values of the main
indicators for this type of visitors only. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page, you can
see a distribution of the visits from new or returning visitors only across the map of the world.

Languages The Languages page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits with different languages.


 The values of the Visitors indicators.

 Languages detail table, which contains the languages, which your site visitors most commonly use,
together with additional indicators for each language, such as bounce rate and average time spent on
your website.

NOTE: To display details about the visitors using each language, click the language code in the table. The
system opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with this specific language, together with the
values of the main indicators for this language only. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the
page, you can see a distribution of the visits with that language only across the map of the world.

Visitor trending When you click Visitor trending, the system displays a detailed report for the Visits indicator, which contains
the detailed chart for the chosen time interval, together with a bar chart displaying absolute and relative
values for each day, week, or month.


If you expand the Visitor trending node, the detailed reports for the rest of the main indicators appear. The
system displays the following reports:

 Unique visitors
 Pageviews
 Average pageviews
This is a detailed report for the Average pages per visit indicator.

 Average time on site
 Bounce rate
NOTE: The detailed report for the New visits rate indicator is not located under Visitor trending. You can
see it by opening the New vs Returning report.

Indicator Unique visitors is not one of the main indicators and is not presented on the Dashboard, but you
can find a detailed report about it under Visitor trending. Unique visitors represents the number of
unduplicated (counted only once) visitors to your website over the course of the selected time interval. A
unique visitor is determined using cookies.

| Information about website visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

169

TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE VISITORS
The information about the technical details of the visitors, such as their browser or network properties, is located under the Visitors
node in the navigation in the left side of the screen.

When you expand the Visitors node, the following reports appear:

Section contents

Devices
The report contains information about browsers most commonly used by your visitors, about their devices and operation
systems, and about the usage of mobile devices for accessing your webpage.

Network properties
The report contains information about the service providers of your visitors.


DEVICES
In the Devices section you can view various statistics for the browsers that your visitors use, their screen resolutions, operating
systems, and more. The section contains one main report and various detailed reports located under the main report.

devices:

170

Section contents

Devices main report
You open the browsers capabilities report by clicking Visitors  Devices in the left side of the page.
The system displays the Devices overview page.

Devices detailed reports
To access all the information related to browsers and other technical details, expand the Devices node.
The system displays a list of reports containing details about browsers and other technical details for the visitors of your
website.

| Technical information about the visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

DEVICES MAIN REPORT
When you click Devices, the Devices overview page appears, displaying the following:

MAIN CHART
The system displays a stacked area chart of the number of visits made with mobile and non-mobile devices.

NOTE: When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page, you can see a distribution of all visits across the map of the
world.

OVERVIEW OF DEVICES REPORTS
In addition to the main chart, the system displays the following overview reports, containing technical data about your website
usage:


Browsers overview The system displays a pie chart representing the contribution of visits with each browser to the traffic of
your website.

171

This indicator shows which browsers people use to reach your site. For example, using Mozilla Firefox or
Internet Explorer.

To display more details, you must open the Browsers report by clicking the view full report link below the
chart or selecting Devices  Browsers from the navigation in the left side of the page.

Operating systems The system displays a pie chart representing the contribution of visits with each operating system to the
overview traffic of your website.

This indicator shows what operating systems do people, visiting your site, use. For example, using Windows
or Linux.

To display more details, you must open the Operating systems report by clicking the view full report link
below the chart or selecting Devices  Operating systems from the navigation in the left side of the page.

Mobile devices The system displays a pie chart representing the contribution of visits with each type of mobile device to the
overview visits of your website with mobile devices.

This indicator shows what mobile devices do people, visiting your site with a mobile device, use. For
example, using iPhone or Android.

To display more details, you must open the Mobile devices report by clicking the view full report link below
the chart or selecting Devices  Mobile devices from the navigation in the left side of the page.

Screen resolutions The system displays a table containing the screen resolutions, used by your site visitors, with the number
overview and the proportion of visitors that are using them.

To display more details, you must open the Screen resolutions report by clicking the view full report link
below the chart or selecting Devices  Screen resolutions from the navigation in the left side of the page.

NOTE: To display details about the visitors using each screen resolution, click the resolution in the table.
The system opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with this specific resolution, together with
the values of the main indicators for this screen resolution only.

| Devices | Technical information about the visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

DEVICES DETAILED REPORTS
When you expand the Devices node, the following reports appear:

Report Description

Browsers The Browsers page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits made with each browser.


 The values of the main indicators.

 Browser details table, containing the browsers, used by your site visitors, with the number and the
proportion of visitors that are using them.

 A pie chart representing the contribution of each browser.

NOTE: To display details about each specific browser from the table, click the browser. The system opens a
report containing the following details about the browser:

 A stacked area chart displaying the visits with each version of this specific browser.

with this browser only across the map of the world.

 The values of the main indicators for this browser only.

 A table containing the versions of the operating systems that are most commonly used to access your

172

NOTE: To display details about each specific version of the browser, click the version in the table.


Operating systems The Operating systems page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits made with each operating system.



 Operating system details table, containing the operating systems, used by your site visitors, with the
number and the proportion of visitors that are using them.

 A pie chart representing the contribution of each operating system.

NOTE: To display details about each specific operating system from the table, click the operating system.
The system opens a report containing the following details about the operating system:

 A stacked area chart displaying the visits with each version of this specific operating system.

with this Operating System only across the map of the world.

 The values of the main indicators for this operating system only.

 A table containing the versions of the operating systems that are most commonly used to access your

NOTE: To display details about each specific version of the operating system, click the version in the
table.


Browsers and OS The Browsers and OS page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of visits made with each combination of operating system and browser.



 Browser and OS details table, containing the combinations of browsers and operating systems, used by
your site visitors, with the number and the proportion of visitors that are using them.

 A pie chart representing the contribution of each combination of browser and operating system.

NOTE: To display details about each specific browsers and operating systems combination, click the
combination in the table. The system opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with this
specific combination, together with the values of the main indicators for this combination only. When
you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page, you can see a distribution of visits with this specific
combination only across the map of the world.

Screen colors The Screen colors page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of visits made with each screen color.



 Screen color Details table, containing the number of colors (represented by bits), used by your site
visitors, with the number and the proportion of visitors that are using them.

 A pie chart representing the contribution of each color.

NOTE: To display details about the visitors using each color, click the color type in the table. The system
opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with this specific screen color, together with the values
of the main indicators for this color only. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page, you can

173

see a distribution of visits with this specific screen color only across the map of the world.

Screen resolutions The Screen resolutions page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of visits made with each screen resolution.



 Screen resolutions details table, containing the screen resolutions, used by your site visitors, with the
number and the proportion of visitors that are using them.

 A pie chart representing the contribution of each resolution.

NOTE: To display details about the visitors using each screen resolution, click the resolution in the table.
The system opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with this specific resolution, together with
the values of the main indicators for this screen resolution only. When you click Map in the upper-right
corner of the page, you can see a distribution of visits with this specific screen resolution only across the
map of the world.

Flash versions The Flash versions page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of visits made with each screen resolution.



 Flash version details table, containing the Flash version, used by your site visitors, with the number and
the proportion of visitors that are using them.

 A pie chart representing the contribution of each Flash version.

NOTE: To display details about the visitors using each Flash version, click the version in the table. The
system opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with this specific Flash version, together with
the values of the main indicators for this Flash version only. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of
the page, you can see a distribution of visits with this specific Flash version only across the map of the
world.

Java support The Java support page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of visits made from visitors with and without Java support.



 Java support details table, containing the number and the portion of visitors that have and do not have
Java support.

 A pie chart representing this proportion.

NOTE: To display details about the visitors who have or do not have Java support, click Yes or No in the
table. The system opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with or without Java support,
together with the values of the main indicators for this type of visits only. When you click Map in the upper-
right corner of the page, you can see a distribution of visits of visitors who have and do not have Java
support across the map of the world.

Mobile devices The Mobile devices page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of visits made with each mobile device.

from mobile devices across the map of the world.


 Mobile device details table, containing the mobile devices that are most commonly used to access your

174

website, ranked according to number of visits from each device and additional data for each device,
such as bounce rate and average time spent on the site.

NOTE: To display details about each specific mobile device from the table, click the device. The system
opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with this specific mobile device only, together with the
values of the main indicators for this device only. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page,
you can see a distribution of visits with this specific mobile device only across the map of the world.

Mobile carriers The Mobile carriers page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of visits made with each mobile carrier.

from mobile devices across the map of the world.


 Mobile Carriers Detail table, containing the mobile carriers that are most commonly used to access your
website via mobile devices, ranked according to number of visits from each mobile carrier and
additional data for each carrier, such as bounce rate and average time spent on the site.

NOTE: To display details about each specific mobile carrier from the table, click the carrier. The system
opens a report containing an area chart of the visits with this specific mobile carrier only, together with the
values of the main indicators for this carrier only. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page,
you can see a distribution of visits with this specific mobile carrier only across the map of the world.

| Devices | Technical information about the visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

NETWORK PROPERTIES
In the Network properties section you can view various statistics for the service providers that your visitors use, their hosts and
connection speeds. The section contains one main report and two detailed reports located under the main report.

network properties:

Section contents

Network properties main report
You open the network properties report by clicking Visitors  Network properties in the left side of the page.
The system displays the Service providers page.

Network properties detailed reports
To access all the information related to your visitor's network, expand the Network properties node.
The system displays a list of reports containing details about the networks of the visitors of your website.

175

| Technical information about the visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

NETWORK PROPERTIES MAIN REPORT
You open the network properties report by clicking Visitors  Network properties in the left side of the page.
The Service providers page appears, displaying the following:

 Main chart
The system displays a stacked area chart of the number of visits with each service provider.

NOTE: When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page, you can see a distribution of all visits across the map of the
world.

 Main indicators
In the Site usage section, the system displays the values of some of the main indicators. The overview charts of the indicators
are not displayed and you cannot click indicators to navigate to detailed reports. This section serves as reference only.

 Service providers details table
The table contains the service providers that are most commonly used to access your website, ranked according to number of
visits with each service provider and additional data for each provider, such as bounce rate and average time spent on the
site.

NOTE: To display details about each specific service provider from the table, click the provider. The system opens a report
containing the following details about the service provider:

 An area chart displaying the visits of users using this specific service provider. When you click Map in the upper-right
corner of the page, you can see a distribution of visits with this specific service provide only across the map of the world.

 The values of the main indicators for this service provider only.

| Network properties | Technical information about the visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

NETWORK PROPERTIES DETAILED REPORTS
To access all the information about the network properties of your users, expand the Network Properties node.
The system displays the following reports:

Report Description

Host names The Host names page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits from different hosts.



 Host name details table, which contains the names of the hosts, which your site visitors use, together
with additional indicators for each host, such as bounce rate and average time spent on the site.

NOTE: To display details about the visitors using each specifics host, click the host name in the table. The
system opens a report containing a detailed chart of the visits from this specific host, together with the
values of the main indicators for this host only. When you click Map in the upper-right corner of the page,
you can see a distribution of visits from this specific host only across the map of the world.

Connection speeds The Connection speeds page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits with different connection speeds.



 Connection speed details table, which contains the type of connections that your visitors use, together
with additional indicators for each connection type, such as bounce rate and average time spent on the
site.

NOTE: To display details about the visitors using each connection type, click the connection in the table.

176

The system opens a report containing a detailed chart of the visits with this specific connection, together
with the values of the main indicators for this connection type only. When you click Map in the upper-right
corner of the page, you can see a distribution of visits with this specific connection speed only across the
map of the world.

| Network properties | Technical information about the visitors | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

INFORMATION ABOUT WEBSITE TRAFFIC SOURCES
In the Traffic sources section you can view various statistics about how do visitors of your website reach it. For example, through
search engines or directly. The section contains one main report and various detailed reports located under the main report.

traffic sources:

Section contents

Traffic sources main report
You open the traffic sources main report by clicking Traffic sources in the left side of the page.
The system displays the Traffic sources overview page.

Traffic sources detailed reports
To access all the information related to the traffic sources of your website, expand the Traffic sources node.
The system displays a list of reports containing details about the traffic sources of your website.


TRAFFIC SOURCES MAIN REPORT
The Traffic source overview page, displays the Traffic sources main report, which contains the most important information,
indicators, and overview reports about the sources of traffic for your website. The Traffic sources overview page is the entry point
when you are browsing information about traffic sources.

The following screenshot is an example of the traffic sources main report with data grouped on daily basis:

177

Section contents


Main chart and Traffic sources indicators
Use this section to view key indicators for the traffic sources of your website and to plot the indicators’ values against time or
view their values distributed over the map of the world.

Overview of Traffic sources reports
Use this section for an overview of reports that contain details about the traffic sources.

| Information about website traffic sources | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

MAIN CHART AND TRAFFIC SOURCES INDICATORS
MAIN CHART

 You can display different indicators by clicking them in the Traffic sources summary section or by selecting them from the
dropdown menu next to the title of the main chart.
By default the system displays an area chart of the Visits indicator.

data using the data grouping button.

month.

TRAFFIC SOURCE INDICATORS
Following the main chart, is section Traffic sources summary. You use this section to view key indicators for the sources of traffic
for your website.

In addition to the total number of visits, the Traffic source overview page displays the following indicators:


Direct traffic visits These are visits by people who clicked a bookmark to visit your site or directly entered your URL in their

178

browser.

Part of those visitors could be visitors recruited by an offline campaign, such as TV commercial.

Referring site visits These are visits by people who reached your website by clicking a link in another site.

Search engine visits These are visits by people who reached your website through a search engine result page.

You can view a detailed area chart by clicking the indicator's overview chart. The system displays the values in the main chart of
the Traffic sources overview page.

For example, if you click the overview chart of Referring site visits indicator, the detailed chart of the indicator is displayed in the
main chart of the Traffic sources overview page.

which contains the detailed area or stacked area chart for this specific indicator for the chosen time interval together with some of
the main indicators and additional details. The detailed reports for the traffic sources indicators can be opened by expanding the
Traffic sources node in the navigation.
For more information, see Traffic sources detailed reports.

| Traffic sources main report | Information about website traffic sources | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

OVERVIEW OF TRAFFIC SOURCES REPORTS
In addition to the above indicators the Traffic sources main report displays also the following tables and charts, containing details
about the traffic sources and what generates them:


A pie chart of the This an indicator that shows how people reach your site, for example, through search engines, through
different types of another site that is referring yours, by entering your URL directly, or in another way.
traffic sources.
NOTE: To display details about each specific source of traffic from the pie chart, click the respective sector
in the chart. The system opens the traffic source detailed report containing an area chart of the visits from
this specific source, together with the values of the main indicators for this source only.

Top traffic sources The table contains the names of the top sources of traffic from all types (for example, search engines, direct
traffic, referring sites), ranked according to number of visitors together with their proportions.

For example, one source of traffic can be listed twice in the table - once as referring, and another time as
organic.

To display more details, you must open All traffic sources report by clicking the view full report link below
the table or by expanding Traffic sources from the navigation in the left side of the page and selecting All
traffic sources.
NOTE: To display details about each specific source of traffic, click the name of the source in the table. The
system opens the respective traffic source detailed report containing an area chart of the visits from this
specific source, together with the values of the main indicators for this source only.

Top search The table contains the keywords most commonly used by visitors in search engines to access your website,
keywords ranked according to number of visits.

To display more details, you must open the Keywords report by clicking the view full report link below the
table or by expanding Traffic sources from the navigation in the left side of the page and selecting
Keywords.
NOTE: To display details about each specific keyword, click it in the table. The system opens the respective
keyword detailed report containing an area chart of the visits resulting from searches of this specific
keyword, together with the values of the main indicators for this keyword only.

For more information, see Traffic sources detailed reports.

| Traffic sources main report | Information about website traffic sources | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

179

TRAFFIC SOURCES DETAILED REPORTS
To access all the information related to the traffic sources of your website, expand the Traffic sources node.

The system displays a list of reports containing details about the traffic sources of your website. Note that the three most common
traffic sources (direct traffic, referring sites, and search engines) are dedicated separate detailed reports:

Report Description

Direct traffic The system displays an area chart of visits from direct traffic only. Below the chart, the system displays the
Site usage section with the main indicators for the direct traffic only and their overview charts. You can
display each of the overview charts in the main chart by clicking them.

Referring sites The system displays the following:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits from referring websites.

 The values of the main indicators for the referring traffic only.

 The Referring sites detail table, displaying the websites from which your visitors most commonly click to
your site, together with some additional indicators for each site, such as bounce rate and time spend on
your website.

NOTE: To display details about each specific site, click it in the table. The system opens the respective
referring site detailed report containing an area chart of the visits coming from this site only, together with
the values of the main indicators for this site only.

Search engines The system displays the following:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits from search engines.

 The values of the main indicators for the search engine traffic only.

 The Search engine details table, displaying the search engines which your visitors most commonly use
to find your site, together with some additional indicators for each search engine, such as bounce rate
and time spent on your website.

NOTE: To display details about each specific search engine, click it in the table. The system opens the
respective search engine detailed report containing an area chart of the visits coming from this search
engine only, together with the values of the main indicators for this engine only.

All traffic sources The system displays the following:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits from each traffic source.

 The main indicators.

 The Traffic sources details table, displaying the combinations of the source of traffic (search engine
name, referral site, etc.) and the type of traffic (referral, search engine result - organic, or other)
together with the visits that are generated by the combination and some additional indicators for each
combination, such as bounce rate and time spent on your website.

NOTE: To display details about each specific source of traffic, click the name of the source in the table. The
system opens the respective traffic source detailed report containing an area chart of the visits from this
specific source, together with the values of the main indicators for this source only.

Keywords The system displays the following:

 A stacked area chart of the visits resulting from each keyword.

 The main indicators for visits from search engines.

 The Keywords details table, displaying the keywords that your users most commonly use to search for
your site, together with the visits that are generated by each keyword and some additional indicators
for each keyword, such as bounce rate and time spent on your website.

NOTE: To display details about each specific keyword, click it in the table. The system opens the respective
keyword detailed report containing an area chart of the visits resulting from this specific keyword, together

180

with the values of the main indicators for this keyword only.

Campaigns The system displays the following:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits of your website that resulting from people who reach your
site being referred from your configured campaigns.

 The main indicators.

 The Campaign details table, displaying the campaigns and the visits generated by each campaign and
some additional indicators for each campaign, such as bounce rate and time spend on your website.

NOTE: To display details about each specific campaign, click it in the table. The system opens the
respective keyword detailed report containing a detailed chart of the visits resulting from that specific
keyword, together with the values of the main indicators for that campaign only.

Ad versions

| Information about website traffic sources | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

INFORMATION ABOUT THE VISITED CONTENT
In the Content section you can view various statistics about what content do visitors of your website view. For example, which
pages do they visit and where do their visits end. The section contains one main report and various detailed reports located under
the main report.

visited content:

Section contents

Content main report
You open the content main report by clicking Content in the left side of the page.
The system displays the Content overview page.

Content detailed reports
To access all the information related to the visited content, expand the Content node.
The system displays a list of reports containing details about the content of your website, which is visited by the users.


CONTENT MAIN REPORT
The Content overview page, displays the Content main report, which contains the most important information, indicators, and
overview reports about the content that is visited. The Content overview page is the entry point when you are browsing
information about the content that the users visit.

The following screenshot is an example of the content main report with data grouped on daily basis:

181

Section contents


Main chart and Content indicators
Use this section to view key indicators for the visited content of your website and to plot the indicators’ values against time or

Overview of Content reports
Use this section for an overview of reports that contain details about the visited content.

| Information about the visited content | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

MAIN CHART AND CONTENT INDICATORS
MAIN CHART

 You can display different indicators by clicking them in the Content summary section or by selecting them from the dropdown
menu next to the title of the main chart.
By default the system displays the Pageviews indicator.


month.

CONTENT INDICATORS
Following the main chart, is section Content summary. You use this section to view key indicators for the visited content of your
website.

In addition to the Pageviews and Bounce rate indicators, described in Main indicators, the following indicators are introduced:

182


Unique pageviews Appears on Content overview page.

The Unique pageviews indicator represents the number of sessions during which a page was viewed. Even if
a page is viewed more than once during one session, it is counted as one unique pageview.

Entrances Appears in Top entry pages detailed report.

The Entrances of one page is the number on times a user's session started on this page.

The Entrances indicator for all the pages of your website is the sum of all pages entrances and is equal to
the Visits indicator. It is used to calculate the Bounce rate.

Exits Appears in Top exit pages detailed report.

The Exits of one page is the number on times a user's session ended on this page, meaning the number of
times the user left your website from this particular page.

The Exits indicator for all the pages of your website is the sum of all pages exits and is equal to the Visits
indicator. It is used to calculate the Exit rate.

Exit rate Appears in all detailed reports, except Top entry pages.

The exit rate of the landing pages is the bounce rate.

The Exit rate is calculated by dividing the number of Exits by the number of Pageviews.

The Exit rate for the entire website is calculated by dividing the sum of all exits by the sum of all pageviews.
A higher exit rate of the entire website means that during a visit the users view fewer pages. If the users
are navigating through more pages during one visit, it means fewer exits per pageviews and lower Exit rate.

For each indicator on Content overview page the system displays an overview chart next to the indicator.
Content overview page.
For example, if you click the overview chart of Bounce rate indicator, the detailed chart of the indicator is displayed in the main
chart.

To display the detailed report of each indicator, you must click the indicator itself. The system opens the indicator's detailed report.

For more information about detailed pages, see Visitors detailed reports and Content detailed reports.

| Content main report | Information about the visited content | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

OVERVIEW OF CONTENT REPORTS
In addition to the above indicators the Content main report displays also the following tables, containing details about the visited
content:


Top content The system displays a table containing the most visited pages of your website, together with the number of
visits of each page and their proportion from the total.

To display more details, you must open Top content report by expanding Content from the navigation in the
left side of the page and selecting Top content.

containing an area chart of the visits of this specific page, together with the values of the main indicators for
this page only.

Top entry pages The system displays a table containing the most common entry pages, together with the number of visits
starting at each page and their proportion from the total. An entry page is the first page that the user views
during a session.

To display more details, you must open Top entry pages report by expanding Content from the navigation in

183

the left side of the page and selecting Top entry pages.

NOTE: To display details about each specific entry page from the table, click the page. The system opens a
report containing an area chart of the visits starting from this specific page, together with the bounce rate
indicator for this page only.

Top exit pages The system displays a table containing the most common exit pages, together with the number of visits
ending at each page and their proportion from the total. An exit page is the last page that the user views
during a visit.

To display more details, you must open Top exit pages report by expanding Content from the navigation in
the left side of the page and selecting Top exit pages.

NOTE: To display details about each specific exit page from the table, click the page. The system opens a
report containing an area chart of the visits ending at this specific page, together with the exit rate indicator
for this page only.

For more information, see Content detailed reports.

| Content main report | Information about the visited content | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

CONTENT DETAILED REPORTS
To access all the information related to the visited content of your website, expand the Content node.

The system displays a list of reports containing details about the content of your website:

Report Description

Top content The Top content page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits of different pages.

 The values of the content indicators.

 Top content details table, which contains the most visited pages of your website, together with the
number of visits of each page, together with additional indicators for each page, such as bounce rate
and average time spent on the page.

containing an area chart of the pageviews of this specific page, together with the values of the main
indicators for this page only.

Content by title The Content by title page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of pageviews of different groups of pages


 Top content by title details table, which contains the most commonly viewed groups of pages on your
site, together with additional indicators for each group of pages, such as bounce rate and average time
spent on the group of pages. The pages are grouped by title.

NOTE: To display details about each specific group of pages from the table, click the group. The system
opens a report containing an area chart of the pageviews of pages from this specific group, together with
the values of the content indicators for this page group only.

Top entry pages The Top entry pages page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of Entrances (Visits) from each page.


 Top entry pages details table, which contains the most common entry pages, together with the number
of visits starting at each page and the bounce rate of each page. An entry page is the first page that
the user views during a session.

NOTE: To display details about each specific entry page from the table, click the page. The system opens a
report containing a detailed chart of the visits starting from this specific page, together with the bounce rate

184

indicator for this page only.

Top exit pages The Top exit pages page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of Exits from each page.


 Top exit pages details table, with contains the most common exit pages, together with the number of
visits ending at each page (exits) and the exit rate of each page. An exit page is the last page that the
user views during a visit.

NOTE: To display details about each specific exit page from the table, click the page. The system opens a
report containing an area chart of the visits ending at this specific page, together with the exit rate indicator
for this page only.

| Information about the visited content | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

INFORMATION ABOUT THE WEBSITE INTERNAL SEARCH
In the Site search section you can view various statistics about your internal site search. For example, this is when a visitor uses
your internal search functionality (the search box on your website) to filter the content of your website.

PREREQUISITES: To track such information you must have search functionality on your website and you must set up site search
in your Google Analytics profile.
For more information see Google Analytics Help  How do I set up Site Search for my profile? on
http://www.google.com/support/analytics/bin/answer.py?hl=en&answer=75817

The Site search section contains one main report and various detailed reports located under the main report.

internal search:

Section contents

Site search main report
To open the Site search section, in the navigation tree on the left, expand the Content node and click Site search.
The Site search overview page appears.

185

Site search detailed reports
To access all the information related to the internal search of your website, expand the Site search node.
The system displays a list of reports containing details about the internal search of your website.


SITE SEARCH MAIN REPORT
The Site search overview page contains the most important information, indicators, and overview reports about the internal search
of your website. The Site search overview page is the entry point when you are browsing information about your site search.

The following screenshot is an example of the site search main report with data grouped on daily basis:

Section contents


Main chart and Site search indicators
Use this section to view key indicators for the internal search of your website and to plot the indicators’ values against time or

Overview of Site search reports
Use this section for an overview of reports that contain details about the internal search.

| Information about the website internal search | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

MAIN CHART AND SITE SEARCH INDICATORS
MAIN CHART
You can display different site search indicators by clicking them in the Site search summary section or by selecting them from
the dropdown menu next to the title of the main chart.
By default the system displays the area chart Visits with search (Unique Visits) indicator.


month.

186

SITE SEARCH INDICATORS
Following the main chart, is section Site search summary. You use this section to view key indicators for your internal search
functionality.

The Site search overview page displays the following indicators:


Unique visits These are the number of visits during which your internal search function was used at least once.

Total unique This is the total number of times your internal site search was used, excluding the times when the same
searches search word was used during the same visit.

Results pageviews This is the number of times the search result pages were viewed, divided by the number of total unique
per search searches.

Search exit rate The number of searches a visitor made immediately before leaving the site, divided by the number of
unique visits with search.

Search refinement The number of searches the visitors made immediately after making a search, divided by the Pageviews of
rate search result pages.

Time after search The average amount of time visitors spent on your site after performing a search.

Search depth The average number of pages visitors viewed after performing a search.

Site search overview page.
For example, if you click the overview chart of Search exit rate indicator, the detailed chart of the indicator is displayed in the
upper part of the dashboard.

which contains the detailed area chart for the chosen time interval together with a bar chart displaying absolute and relative values
for each day, week, or month. The detailed reports for the indicators in the site search report are located under Content  Site
search  Trending.
For more information about detailed pages, see Site search detailed reports.

| Site search main report | Information about the website internal search | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

OVERVIEW OF SITE SEARCH REPORTS
In addition to the above indicators the Site search main report displays also the following tables, containing details about the
internal search of your website:


Top site searches The table displays the five most used search terms that your visitors enter in your internal search, together
with their frequency and their proportion in the total.

To display more details, you must open the Search terms report by clicking the view full report link below
the table or by expanding Visitors from the navigation in the left side of the page and clicking Network
properties  Connection speeds. To display the Search terms detailed page, click view full report link below
the table.

NOTE: To display details about each specific search term from the table, click the term in the table. The
system opens a report containing a detailed chart of the usage of this specific search term, together with
the values of the main indicators for this term only.

Top searched The table displays the top five pages where your visitors started their search, together with the number of

187

content searches that were conducted on each page and their proportion of the total searches.

To display the Site search start pages detailed page, click view full report link below the table.

NOTE: To display details about each specific search starting page, click the page in the table. The system
opens a report containing a detailed chart of the number of searches started on this page, together with the
values of the main indicators for this page only.

| Site search main report | Information about the website internal search | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

SITE SEARCH DETAILED REPORTS
To access all the information related to the visitors of your website, expand the Site Search node.

The system displays a list of reports containing details about the internal search of your website:

Report Description

Usage The Site search usage page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of visits with and without search.


 Site search details table, which shows the number and the proportion of visits in which the site search
was used and was not used.

 A pie chart representing this proportion.

NOTE: To display details about visits with or visits without search, click the relevant entry in the table. The
system opens a report containing an area chart of the number of searches where the internal search was or
wan not used, together with the values of the main indicators for this type of usage only.

Search terms The Site search terms page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of number of unique searches with a particular search term.

 The values of the site search indicators.

 Site search terms detail table, which contains the most used search words, together with their
frequencies and additional indicators such as time spent on the site after the search.

NOTE: To display details about each specific search term, click it in the table. The system opens the
respective search term detailed report containing an area chart of the number of times this search term was
used, together with the values of the site search indicators for this search term only.

Start pages The Site search start pages page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of unique searches started from a particular page.

 The values of the site search indicators.

 Site search start pages details table, containing the most common pages from your website where the
search was stared, together with their frequencies and proportions.

 A pie chart depicting this proportion.

NOTE: To display details about each specific site search starting page, click it in the table. The system
opens the respective page detailed report containing an area chart of the number of times that search was
started from this page, together with the values of the site search indicators for this page only.

Destination pages The Site search destination pages page appears, where the following is displayed:

 A stacked area chart of the number of unique searches that ended on a particular page.

 The values of the site usage indicators.

 Site search destination pages details table containing the pages that are most commonly found by using
your internal search, together with the number of searches that led the users to each page, and their
proportion of the total.

188

 A pie chart depicting this proportion.

NOTE: To display details about each specific site search destination page, click it in the table. The system
opens the respective page detailed report containing an area chart of the number of times that search led to
this page, together with the values of the site search indicators for this page only.

Categories

Trending This section displays the site search indicators in details. When you click Trending, the system displays an
area chart and a bar chart with the daily visits in which the internal search was used. When you expand the
Trending node, the detailed paged for the other site search indicators appear. Each page contains the
detailed chart of the indicators for the chosen time interval together with a bar chart displaying absolute and
relative values for each day.

| Information about the website internal search | Working with the Sitefinity Analytics module | Table of contents |

CUSTOMIZING ANALYTICS

CHANGING THE SETTINGS
Use the settings to change the website for which the Analytics module displays data and to view the Goggle Analytics tracking
code.

1. To open settings, click Settings under Customizations in the bottom-left corner of the page.
The Google Analytics settings page appears.

2. You can choose another account associated with the same username, or you can enter another Google Analytics username
and password and choose the desired account.

3. Click Save Configuration Information.
The data for the new account is displayed in the Analytics module.

NOTE: In Settings section, you can view and copy the Google Analytics tracking code for the account you are displaying in the
Analytics module.

CHANGING PERMISSIONS
Use the permissions to select which reports each user is allowed to see.

1. To open permissions, click Permissions under Customization in the bottom-left corner of the page.
The Analytics dashboard permissions page appears.

 On the left, the page displays all created Sitefinity users, except the users that you chose to be administrators of the
Analytics.
For more information about creating users, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide Managing users, roles,
and permissions  Managing users.
 On the right, the page displays a list of all available report from the Analytics module. The reports, which the selected
user has view permissions for, appears selected.

2. To grant or deny permissions to the user, select and deselect the checkbox of the respective report.

3. When you are finished, click Update Permissions.

CHOOSING ANALYTICS ADMINISTRATORS
Use the administrators to assign and unassign users to the administrators role in Analytics module.

NOTE: The administrators you create in the Analytics module are not assigned the administrators role in Sitefinity. For more
information about Sitefinity roles, see Sitefinity Installation and Administration Guide  Managing users, roles, and permissions 
Managing roles.
1. To change administrators, click Administrators under Customization in the bottom-left corner of the page.
A list of all created users appears.
The users that are already assigned as administrators of Analytics have their checkboxes selected.

2. To assign and unassign users as administrators, select or deselect their checkboxes.

189

NOTE: You must have at least one user selected.

3. When you are finished, click Update Analytics Administrators.
A status message appears.


INDEX OF REPORTS
Sitefinity Analytics section has the following predefined reports that help you analyze the traffic of your website. The reports are
grouped logically in the navigation tree on the left of Analytics. You can also select a report directly from the dropdown box above
the navigation. The following table lists all reports available in the dropdown box:

Report name More information

Ad versions Traffic sources detailed reports

All traffic sources Traffic sources detailed reports

Average pageviews Visitors detailed reports  Visitor trending

Average time on site Visitors detailed reports  Visitor trending

Bounce rate Visitors detailed reports  Visitor trending

Browsers Devices detailed reports

Browsers and OS Devices detailed reports

Campaigns Traffic sources detailed reports

Connection speeds Network properties detailed reports

Content overview Content main report

Content by title Content detailed reports

Device overview Devices main report

Direct traffic Traffic sources detailed reports

Flash versions Devices detailed reports

Host names Network properties detailed reports

Java support Devices detailed reports

Keywords Traffic sources detailed reports

Languages Visitors detailed reports

Main overview Understanding the Dashboard

Mobile carriers Devices detailed reports

Mobile devices Devices detailed reports

New vs Returning Visitors detailed reports

Operating systems Devices detailed reports

Pageviews Visitors detailed reports  Visitor trending

Screen colors Devices detailed reports

Screen resolutions Devices detailed reports

Search depth Site search detailed reports  Trending

Search engines Traffic sources detailed reports

Search exits Site search detailed reports  Trending

Search refinements Site search detailed reports  Trending

190

Service providers Network properties main report

Site search categories Site search detailed reports

Site search destination pages Site search detailed reports

Site search overview Site search main report

Site search start pages Site search detailed reports

Site search terms Site search detailed reports

Site search usage Site search detailed reports

Time after search Site search detailed reports  Trending

Top content Content detailed reports

Top exit pages Content detailed reports

Total unique searches Site search detailed reports  Trending

Traffic sources overview Traffic sources main report

Unique visitors Visitors detailed reports  Visitor trending

User defined
Visitors overview Visitors main report

Visits for all visitors Visitors detailed reports  Visitor trending

Visits with search Site search detailed reports  Trending


SITEFINITY BASIC SETTINGS
You can modify the settings entirely through the Sitefinity backend UI. All Sitefinity-specific settings are taken out of the project’s
web.config file and put into separate configuration files in the App_Data/Sitefinity/Configurations folder. The web.config
file includes only standard ASP.NET configurations. This means that Sitefinity upgrades do not override client configuration
settings.

To open the Settings page, from the menu at the upper part of the screen, click Administration  Settings.
The Basic Settings page appears.

Section contents

On the Basic Settings page, you can configure the following:

 General settings
In this section, you can adjust the time zone that Sitefinity is using, by selecting it from the Time zone dropdown box.
You can also select if you want to automatically adjust the clock for Daylight saving time.

Languages
Use this section to add different languages for your public website. You can also add different languages for the backend of
your website.

Comments
Use this section to configure general settings for comments that are left on the website.

Twitter applications
Use this page to add and configure registered Twitter applications to Sitefinity. Through Sitefinity backend you can use the
Twitter API to publish tweets.

Newsletters
Use this procedure to configure email setting – SMTP stand for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. The settings are needed for the
system to send emails with newsletters to subscribers.

If you need to configure other settings, you must click Advanced link.
The Settings page appears.

The Settings page has the following structure:

191

 Treeview with a list of all configuration sections.

 Element section for editing configuration elements.

 List of properties that could be configured in the backend.

For more information, see Sitefinity Installation and administration guide  System settings.


MANAGING LANGUAGES
In Sitefinity you can localize pages and content items by creating as many language versions as required. You can create different
languages for the frontend of your website as well as for the backend. Frontend and backend languages can be created
independently.

To open the language settings, in the main menu, click Administration  Settings.
The Basic Settings page appears where you click Languages.

ADDING FRONTEND LANGUAGES
Under Languages you can see all frontend languages that you have installed.

1. To add a new language, click Add languages… button.
The Select languages window appears, displaying a list of all available languages. If you want to add different language
cultures, click Show cultures.

2. Select one or more languages or cultures and click Done.
The selected languages are added under Languages section.

You must have one default language. This is the language that your website opens in. For each additional language, the
system displays the Set as default link and Delete link. You cannot delete a default language.

When you have added more than one language, the Multilingual URLs section appears.

3. Select how the URLs of the pages will appear in each of the added languages.
Choose between the following:

 Directories
You use one domain, where different language versions are represented with different directories that are automatically
created.

 Different domains
You use different domain names for each language. The system displays an input field for each language that you have
added.
In each field, enter the respective domain name.


After you have added a language, you can translate pages and content items in this language.

ADDING BACKEND LANGUAGES
You can see the default language for the backend under Default language for the backend system.

1. To add more backend languages, click Manage backend languages  Add languages…
The Select languages window appears, displaying a list of all available languages. If you want to add different language
cultures, click Show cultures.

2. Select one or more languages or cultures and click Done.
The selected languages are added under Languages for the backend section.

You must have one default language. This is the language that your website backend opens in. For each additional language,
the system displays the Set as default link and Delete link. You cannot delete a default language.

3. Click Close languages for the backend system link.


192

After you have added a backend language, you must translate and display the interface labels and messages. For more
information, see Sitefinity Installation and administration guide  Managing labels and translating Sitefinity  Translating Sitefinity
backend.

| Sitefinity basic settings | Table of contents |

MANAGING COMMENTS
Use this page to manage setting for comments left about content items. Website visitors can leave comments about blog posts,
events, and news. When creating a content item, you can specify if you want users to be able to leave comments for this particular
item.

You can change the following settings:

1. Under Who can post comments, select one of the following:

 Anyone
 Only registered users
Use this option only if you have user registration on your website.

2. If you want comments not to be publically visible until the responsible user publishes them, select Comments have to be
approved before appear on the site checkbox.
If you select this checkbox, comments that are left on the website are initially saved in status Hidden.

3. If you want users to complete a CAPTCHA when leaving a comment, select Use spam protection image (captcha) checkbox.

4. If you want to disable comments for older content items, select Automatically close comments for items older than <number>
days checkbox.
The form for leaving comments will be hidden from the website for content items created before the days you have specified.

5. Select the fields that are displayed in the form for leaving comments. You can choose to display one or more of the following
fields:

 Name
 Email
 Website
 Message
When you select a field, you can choose whether you want to make the field mandatory by selecting the Required checkbox
that appears.

6. When finished with the settings, click Save changes button.

You can make additional configurations of comments, using the advanced settings. To open advanced settings of comments, on
Basic Settings page, click Advanced and in the navigation on the lift, click Comments.


MANAGING TWITTER APPLICATIONS
Use this page to add and configure registered Twitter applications to Sitefinity. Through Sitefinity backend you can use the Twitter
API to publish tweets. For example, your blog posts can be published as tweets. To do this you need to register a Twitter
application in Twitter and add it in Sitefinity.

NOTE: Sitefinity application is added as an application by default and you can use it to tweet. You must register additional
applications only if you do not want to use Sitefinity. You can, for example, add the name of your website as an application.
Even if you do not register your own application, you must assign users to Sitefinity application – Step 6 and Step 7 of the
following procedure.

To register an application, perform the following:

1. Click Register an application in Twitter link.
The Register an Application form opens.
For more information, see twitter developers page on http://dev.twitter.com/.

193

2. Fill out the registration form.
When you complete your application registration, Twitter will generate a Consumer key and Consumer secret for your
application.

3. On Sitefinity’s Basic Settings page, click Add a registered Twitter application button.

4. Enter the Application Name, the Consumer Key and Secret, generated by Twitter.

5. Click Save.
The application appears in the list of registered applications.

You can delete an application by clicking its Actions button and selecting Delete.

6. To associate Twitter users with an application, click the Actions link of the respective application and then click Associate
Twitter User.
You must associate at least one user, because there must be a Twitter user from whose account the tweets will be published.
You can add more than one user to an application.

For example, you can register an application MyNews, but you can associate two accounts with that application – sports and
weather. Some people may follow only the sports other may follow only the weather.
Twitter opens, asking you to grant access to the application to your Twitter data.

7. Enter the login credentials of the user, which you want to associate and click Allow.
The user appears under ASSOCIATED USERS on Basic Settings page.


NEWSLETTERS SETTINGS
Use this procedure to configure email setting – SMTP stand for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. The settings are needed for the
system to send emails with newsletters to subscribers.

You configure SMTP settings in the following way:

1. In the main menu, click Administration  Settings.
The Basic Settings page appears.

2. Click Newsletters.
The SMTP settings appear.

3. Configure the following properties:

Host Enter the name or IP address of the host used for SMTP transactions.

Port Enter the port used for SMTP transactions.

Use SMTP authentication Select if you want to authenticate when you login to the server.

If you select this checkbox the following fields appear:

 Username
Enter the user name of the account that you use to connect to the SMTP server

 Password
Enter the password of the account that you use to connect to the SMTP server

 Use SMTP SSL
Select if you want Sitefinity to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to encrypt the connection.

4. You can test the setting by sending a test email.
To do this, enter the test email in Email field and click Send test message.


194

User guide

More Related Content

Similar to User guide (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

User guide